Symaptic: os/kernelhwsrv/kernel/eka/include/e32cmn.inl@260cb5ec6c19 (annotated)

sl@0	1	// Copyright (c) 1994-2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
sl@0	2	// All rights reserved.
sl@0	3	// This component and the accompanying materials are made available
sl@0	4	// under the terms of the License "Eclipse Public License v1.0"
sl@0	5	// which accompanies this distribution, and is available
sl@0	6	// at the URL "http://www.eclipse.org/legal/epl-v10.html".
sl@0	7	//
sl@0	8	// Initial Contributors:
sl@0	9	// Nokia Corporation - initial contribution.
sl@0	10	//
sl@0	11	// Contributors:
sl@0	12	//
sl@0	13	// Description:
sl@0	14	// e32\include\e32cmn.inl
sl@0	15	//
sl@0	16	//
sl@0	17
sl@0	18	#ifndef __PLACEMENT_NEW_INLINE
sl@0	19	#define __PLACEMENT_NEW_INLINE
sl@0	20	// Global placement operator new
sl@0	21	inline TAny* operator new(TUint /aSize/, TAny* aBase) __NO_THROW
sl@0	22	{return aBase;}
sl@0	23
sl@0	24	// Global placement operator delete
sl@0	25	inline void operator delete(TAny* /aPtr/, TAny* /aBase/) __NO_THROW
sl@0	26	{}
sl@0	27	#endif //__PLACEMENT_NEW_INLINE
sl@0	28
sl@0	29	#ifndef __PLACEMENT_VEC_NEW_INLINE
sl@0	30	#define __PLACEMENT_VEC_NEW_INLINE
sl@0	31	// Global placement operator new[]
sl@0	32	inline TAny* operator new[](TUint /aSize/, TAny* aBase) __NO_THROW
sl@0	33	{return aBase;}
sl@0	34
sl@0	35	// Global placement operator delete[]
sl@0	36	inline void operator delete[](TAny* /aPtr/, TAny* /aBase/) __NO_THROW
sl@0	37	{}
sl@0	38	#endif //__PLACEMENT_VEC_NEW_INLINE
sl@0	39
sl@0	40
sl@0	41	// class RAllocator
sl@0	42	inline RAllocator::RAllocator()
sl@0	43	{
sl@0	44	iAccessCount=1;
sl@0	45	iHandleCount=0;
sl@0	46	iHandles=0;
sl@0	47	iFlags=0;
sl@0	48	iCellCount=0;
sl@0	49	iTotalAllocSize=0;
sl@0	50	}
sl@0	51	inline void RAllocator::__DbgMarkCheck(TBool aCountAll, TInt aCount, const TUint8* aFileName, TInt aLineNum)
sl@0	52	{__DbgMarkCheck(aCountAll, aCount, TPtrC8(aFileName), aLineNum);}
sl@0	53
sl@0	54	// Class RHeap
sl@0	55	inline RHeap::RHeap()
sl@0	56	{}
sl@0	57
sl@0	58	/**
sl@0	59	@return The maximum length to which the heap can grow.
sl@0	60
sl@0	61	@publishedAll
sl@0	62	@released
sl@0	63	*/
sl@0	64	inline TInt RHeap::MaxLength() const
sl@0	65	{return iMaxLength;}
sl@0	66
sl@0	67	inline void RHeap::operator delete(TAny, TAny)
sl@0	68	/**
sl@0	69	Called if constructor issued by operator new(TUint aSize, TAny* aBase) throws exception.
sl@0	70	This is dummy as corresponding new operator does not allocate memory.
sl@0	71	*/
sl@0	72	{}
sl@0	73
sl@0	74
sl@0	75	inline TUint8* RHeap::Base() const
sl@0	76	/**
sl@0	77	Gets a pointer to the start of the heap.
sl@0	78
sl@0	79	Note that because of the small space overhead incurred by all allocated cells,
sl@0	80	no cell will have the same address as that returned by this function.
sl@0	81
sl@0	82	@return A pointer to the base of the heap.
sl@0	83	*/
sl@0	84	{return iBase;}
sl@0	85
sl@0	86
sl@0	87
sl@0	88
sl@0	89	inline TInt RHeap::Size() const
sl@0	90	/**
sl@0	91	Gets the current size of the heap.
sl@0	92
sl@0	93	This is the total number of bytes committed by the host chunk.
sl@0	94	It is the requested size rounded up by page size minus the size of RHeap object(116 bytes)
sl@0	95	minus the cell alignment overhead as shown:
sl@0	96
sl@0	97	Size = (Rounded committed size - Size of RHeap - Cell Alignment Overhead).
sl@0	98
sl@0	99	The cell alignment overhead varies between release builds and debug builds.
sl@0	100
sl@0	101	Note that this value is always greater than the total space available across all allocated cells.
sl@0	102
sl@0	103	@return The size of the heap.
sl@0	104
sl@0	105	@see Rheap::Available( )
sl@0	106	*/
sl@0	107	{return iTop-iBase;}
sl@0	108
sl@0	109
sl@0	110
sl@0	111
sl@0	112	inline TInt RHeap::Align(TInt a) const
sl@0	113	/**
sl@0	114	@internalComponent
sl@0	115	*/
sl@0	116	{return _ALIGN_UP(a, iAlign);}
sl@0	117
sl@0	118
sl@0	119
sl@0	120
sl@0	121	inline const TAny* RHeap::Align(const TAny* a) const
sl@0	122	/**
sl@0	123	@internalComponent
sl@0	124	*/
sl@0	125	{return (const TAny*)_ALIGN_UP((TLinAddr)a, iAlign);}
sl@0	126
sl@0	127
sl@0	128
sl@0	129
sl@0	130	inline TBool RHeap::IsLastCell(const SCell* aCell) const
sl@0	131	/**
sl@0	132	@internalComponent
sl@0	133	*/
sl@0	134	{return (((TUint8*)aCell) + aCell->len) == iTop;}
sl@0	135
sl@0	136
sl@0	137
sl@0	138
sl@0	139	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	140	inline void RHeap::Lock() const
sl@0	141	/**
sl@0	142	@internalComponent
sl@0	143	*/
sl@0	144	{((RFastLock&)iLock).Wait();}
sl@0	145
sl@0	146
sl@0	147
sl@0	148
sl@0	149	inline void RHeap::Unlock() const
sl@0	150	/**
sl@0	151	@internalComponent
sl@0	152	*/
sl@0	153	{((RFastLock&)iLock).Signal();}
sl@0	154
sl@0	155
sl@0	156	inline TInt RHeap::ChunkHandle() const
sl@0	157	/**
sl@0	158	@internalComponent
sl@0	159	*/
sl@0	160	{
sl@0	161	return iChunkHandle;
sl@0	162	}
sl@0	163	#endif
sl@0	164
sl@0	165
sl@0	166
sl@0	167
sl@0	168	// Class TRefByValue
sl@0	169	template <class T>
sl@0	170	inline TRefByValue<T>::TRefByValue(T &aRef)
sl@0	171	: iRef(aRef)
sl@0	172	/**
sl@0	173	Constructs this value reference for the specified referenced object.
sl@0	174
sl@0	175	@param aRef The referenced object.
sl@0	176	*/
sl@0	177	{}
sl@0	178
sl@0	179
sl@0	180
sl@0	181
sl@0	182	template <class T>
sl@0	183	inline TRefByValue<T>::operator T &()
sl@0	184	/**
sl@0	185	Gets a reference to the object encapsulated inside this value reference.
sl@0	186	*/
sl@0	187	{return(iRef);}
sl@0	188
sl@0	189
sl@0	190
sl@0	191
sl@0	192	/**
sl@0	193	Creates the logical channel.
sl@0	194
sl@0	195	@param aDevice The name of the logical device for which the channel
sl@0	196	is to be constructed. This is the name by which
sl@0	197	the LDD factory object, i.e. the instance of
sl@0	198	the DLogicalDevice derived class, is known.
sl@0	199	@param aVer The required version of the logical device. The driver
sl@0	200	normally checks this against the version of the logical
sl@0	201	channel, returning KErrNotSupported if the logical channel
sl@0	202	is not compatible.
sl@0	203	@param aUnit A unit of the device. This argument only has meaning if
sl@0	204	the flag KDeviceAllowUnit is set in the iParseMask data
sl@0	205	member of the LDD factory object.
sl@0	206	@param aDriver A pointer to a descriptor containing the name of
sl@0	207	a physical device. This is the name by which the PDD
sl@0	208	factory object, i.e. the instance of the DPhysicalDevice
sl@0	209	derived class, is known.
sl@0	210	This is NULL, if no explicit name is to be supplied, or
sl@0	211	the logical device does not require an accompanying physical
sl@0	212	device.
sl@0	213	@param aInfo A pointer to an explicit 8-bit descriptor containing extra
sl@0	214	information for the physical device. This argument only has
sl@0	215	meaning if the KDeviceAllowInfo flag is set in the iParseMask
sl@0	216	data member of the LDD factory object.
sl@0	217	@param aType An enumeration whose enumerators define the ownership of
sl@0	218	this handle. If not explicitly specified, EOwnerProcess is
sl@0	219	taken as default.
sl@0	220	@param aTransferable If false, the channel is created as an object which is
sl@0	221	local/private to the current process.
sl@0	222	If true, the channel is an object which may be shared with
sl@0	223	other processes using the IPC mechanisms for handle passing.
sl@0	224
sl@0	225	@return KErrNone, if successful; otherwise one of the other system wide
sl@0	226	error codes.
sl@0	227	*/
sl@0	228	inline TInt RBusLogicalChannel::DoCreate(const TDesC& aDevice, const TVersion& aVer, TInt aUnit, const TDesC* aDriver, const TDesC8* aInfo, TOwnerType aType, TBool aTransferable)
sl@0	229	{ return DoCreate(aDevice, aVer, aUnit, aDriver, aInfo, (TInt)aType \| (aTransferable?KCreateProtectedObject:0) ); }
sl@0	230
sl@0	231
sl@0	232
sl@0	233
sl@0	234	// Class TChar
sl@0	235	inline TChar::TChar()
sl@0	236	/**
sl@0	237	Default constructor.
sl@0	238
sl@0	239	Constructs this character object with an undefined value.
sl@0	240	*/
sl@0	241	{}
sl@0	242
sl@0	243
sl@0	244
sl@0	245
sl@0	246	inline TChar::TChar(TUint aChar)
sl@0	247	: iChar(aChar)
sl@0	248	/**
sl@0	249	Constructs this character object and initialises it with the specified value.
sl@0	250
sl@0	251	@param aChar The initialisation value.
sl@0	252	*/
sl@0	253	{}
sl@0	254
sl@0	255
sl@0	256
sl@0	257
sl@0	258	inline TChar& TChar::operator-=(TUint aChar)
sl@0	259	/**
sl@0	260	Subtracts an unsigned integer value from this character object.
sl@0	261
sl@0	262	This character object is changed by the operation.
sl@0	263
sl@0	264	@param aChar The value to be subtracted.
sl@0	265
sl@0	266	@return A reference to this character object.
sl@0	267	*/
sl@0	268	{iChar-=aChar;return(*this);}
sl@0	269
sl@0	270
sl@0	271
sl@0	272
sl@0	273	inline TChar& TChar::operator+=(TUint aChar)
sl@0	274	/**
sl@0	275	Adds an unsigned integer value to this character object.
sl@0	276
sl@0	277	This character object is changed by the operation.
sl@0	278
sl@0	279	@param aChar The value to be added.
sl@0	280
sl@0	281	@return A reference to this character object.
sl@0	282	*/
sl@0	283	{iChar+=aChar;return(*this);}
sl@0	284
sl@0	285
sl@0	286
sl@0	287
sl@0	288	inline TChar TChar::operator-(TUint aChar)
sl@0	289	/**
sl@0	290	Gets the result of subtracting an unsigned integer value from this character
sl@0	291	object.
sl@0	292
sl@0	293	This character object is not changed.
sl@0	294
sl@0	295	@param aChar The value to be subtracted.
sl@0	296
sl@0	297	@return A character object whose value is the result of the subtraction
sl@0	298	operation.
sl@0	299	*/
sl@0	300	{return(iChar-aChar);}
sl@0	301
sl@0	302
sl@0	303
sl@0	304
sl@0	305	inline TChar TChar::operator+(TUint aChar)
sl@0	306	/**
sl@0	307	Gets the result of adding an unsigned integer value to this character object.
sl@0	308
sl@0	309	This character object is not changed.
sl@0	310
sl@0	311	@param aChar The value to be added.
sl@0	312
sl@0	313	@return A character object whose value is the result of the addition operation.
sl@0	314	*/
sl@0	315	{return(iChar+aChar);}
sl@0	316
sl@0	317
sl@0	318
sl@0	319
sl@0	320	inline TChar::operator TUint() const
sl@0	321	/**
sl@0	322	Gets the value of the character as an unsigned integer.
sl@0	323
sl@0	324	The operator casts a TChar to a TUint, returning the TUint value wrapped by
sl@0	325	this character object.
sl@0	326	*/
sl@0	327	{return(iChar);}
sl@0	328
sl@0	329
sl@0	330
sl@0	331
sl@0	332	// Class TDesC8
sl@0	333	inline TBool TDesC8::operator<(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
sl@0	334	/**
sl@0	335	Determines whether this descriptor's data is less than the specified
sl@0	336	descriptor's data.
sl@0	337
sl@0	338	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	339
sl@0	340	@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	341	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	342
sl@0	343	@return True if greater than or equal, false otherwise.
sl@0	344
sl@0	345	@see TDesC8::Compare
sl@0	346	*/
sl@0	347	{return(Compare(aDes)<0);}
sl@0	348
sl@0	349
sl@0	350
sl@0	351
sl@0	352	inline TBool TDesC8::operator<=(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
sl@0	353	/**
sl@0	354	Determines whether this descriptor's data is less than or equal to the
sl@0	355	specified descriptor's data.
sl@0	356
sl@0	357	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	358
sl@0	359	@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	360	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	361
sl@0	362	@return True if less than or equal, false otherwise.
sl@0	363
sl@0	364	@see TDesC8::Compare
sl@0	365	*/
sl@0	366	{return(Compare(aDes)<=0);}
sl@0	367
sl@0	368
sl@0	369
sl@0	370
sl@0	371	inline TBool TDesC8::operator>(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
sl@0	372	/**
sl@0	373	Determines whether this descriptor's data is greater than the specified
sl@0	374	descriptor's data.
sl@0	375
sl@0	376	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	377
sl@0	378	@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	379	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	380
sl@0	381	@return True if greater than, false otherwise.
sl@0	382
sl@0	383	@see TDesC8::Compare
sl@0	384	*/
sl@0	385	{return(Compare(aDes)>0);}
sl@0	386
sl@0	387
sl@0	388
sl@0	389
sl@0	390	inline TBool TDesC8::operator>=(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
sl@0	391	/**
sl@0	392	Determines whether this descriptor's data is greater than or equal to the
sl@0	393	specified descriptor's data.
sl@0	394
sl@0	395	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	396
sl@0	397	@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	398	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	399
sl@0	400	@return True if greater than, false otherwise.
sl@0	401
sl@0	402	@see TDesC8::Compare
sl@0	403	*/
sl@0	404	{return(Compare(aDes)>=0);}
sl@0	405
sl@0	406
sl@0	407
sl@0	408
sl@0	409	inline TBool TDesC8::operator==(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
sl@0	410	/**
sl@0	411	Determines whether this descriptor's data is equal to the specified
sl@0	412	descriptor's data.
sl@0	413
sl@0	414	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	415
sl@0	416	@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	417	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	418
sl@0	419	@return True if equal, false otherwise.
sl@0	420
sl@0	421	@see TDesC8::Compare
sl@0	422	*/
sl@0	423	{return(Compare(aDes)==0);}
sl@0	424
sl@0	425
sl@0	426
sl@0	427
sl@0	428	inline TBool TDesC8::operator!=(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
sl@0	429	/**
sl@0	430	Determines whether this descriptor's data is not equal to the specified
sl@0	431	descriptor's data.
sl@0	432
sl@0	433	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	434
sl@0	435	@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	436	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	437
sl@0	438	@return True if not equal, false otherwise.
sl@0	439
sl@0	440	@see TDesC8::Compare
sl@0	441	*/
sl@0	442	{return(Compare(aDes)!=0);}
sl@0	443
sl@0	444
sl@0	445
sl@0	446
sl@0	447	inline const TUint8 &TDesC8::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
sl@0	448	/**
sl@0	449	Gets a reference to a single data item within this descriptor's data.
sl@0	450
sl@0	451	@param anIndex The position of the individual data item within the descriptor's
sl@0	452	data. This is an offset value; a zero value refers to the
sl@0	453	leftmost data position.
sl@0	454
sl@0	455	@return A reference to the data item.
sl@0	456
sl@0	457	@panic USER 21, if anIndex is negative or greater than or equal to the current
sl@0	458	length of the descriptor.
sl@0	459	*/
sl@0	460	{return(AtC(anIndex));}
sl@0	461
sl@0	462
sl@0	463
sl@0	464
sl@0	465	inline TInt TDesC8::Length() const
sl@0	466	/**
sl@0	467	Gets the length of the data.
sl@0	468
sl@0	469	This is the number of 8-bit values or data items represented by the descriptor.
sl@0	470
sl@0	471	@return The length of the data represented by the descriptor.
sl@0	472	*/
sl@0	473	{return(iLength&KMaskDesLength8);}
sl@0	474
sl@0	475
sl@0	476
sl@0	477
sl@0	478	inline TInt TDesC8::Size() const
sl@0	479	/**
sl@0	480	Gets the size of the data.
sl@0	481
sl@0	482	This is the number of bytes occupied by the data represented by the descriptor.
sl@0	483
sl@0	484	@return The size of the data represented by the descriptor.
sl@0	485	*/
sl@0	486	{return(Length());}
sl@0	487
sl@0	488
sl@0	489
sl@0	490
sl@0	491	inline void TDesC8::DoSetLength(TInt aLength)
sl@0	492	{iLength=(iLength&(~KMaskDesLength8))\|aLength;}
sl@0	493
sl@0	494
sl@0	495
sl@0	496
sl@0	497	// Class TPtrC8
sl@0	498	inline void TPtrC8::Set(const TUint8 *aBuf,TInt aLength)
sl@0	499	/**
sl@0	500	Sets the 8-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor to point to the specified
sl@0	501	location in memory, whether in RAM or ROM.
sl@0	502
sl@0	503	The length of the descriptor is set to the specified length.
sl@0	504
sl@0	505	@param aBuf A pointer to the location that the descriptor is to represent.
sl@0	506	@param aLength The length of the descriptor. This value must be non-negative.
sl@0	507
sl@0	508	@panic USER 29, if aLength is negative.
sl@0	509	*/
sl@0	510	{new(this) TPtrC8(aBuf,aLength);}
sl@0	511
sl@0	512
sl@0	513
sl@0	514
sl@0	515	inline void TPtrC8::Set(const TDesC8 &aDes)
sl@0	516	/**
sl@0	517	Sets the 8-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor from the specified descriptor.
sl@0	518
sl@0	519	It is set to point to the same data and is given the same length.
sl@0	520
sl@0	521	@param aDes A reference to an 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	522	*/
sl@0	523	{new(this) TPtrC8(aDes);}
sl@0	524
sl@0	525
sl@0	526
sl@0	527
sl@0	528	inline void TPtrC8::Set(const TPtrC8& aPtr)
sl@0	529	/**
sl@0	530	Sets the 8-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor from the specified
sl@0	531	non-modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	532
sl@0	533	It is set to point to the same data and is given the same length.
sl@0	534
sl@0	535	@param aPtr A reference to an 8-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	536	*/
sl@0	537	{new(this) TPtrC8(aPtr);}
sl@0	538
sl@0	539
sl@0	540
sl@0	541
sl@0	542
sl@0	543	// class TBufCBase8
sl@0	544	inline TPtr8 TBufCBase8::DoDes(TInt aMaxLength)
sl@0	545	{return TPtr8(*this,aMaxLength);}
sl@0	546
sl@0	547
sl@0	548
sl@0	549
sl@0	550	// Template class TBufC8
sl@0	551	template <TInt S>
sl@0	552	inline TBufC8<S>::TBufC8()
sl@0	553	: TBufCBase8()
sl@0	554	/**
sl@0	555	Constructs an empty 8-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	556
sl@0	557	It contains no data.
sl@0	558
sl@0	559	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which
sl@0	560	is created as part of the buffer descriptor object.
sl@0	561
sl@0	562	Data can, subsequently, be assigned into this buffer descriptor using the
sl@0	563	assignment operators.
sl@0	564
sl@0	565	@see TBufC8::operator=
sl@0	566	*/
sl@0	567	{}
sl@0	568
sl@0	569
sl@0	570
sl@0	571
sl@0	572	template <TInt S>
sl@0	573	inline TBufC8<S>::TBufC8(const TUint8 *aString)
sl@0	574	: TBufCBase8(aString,S)
sl@0	575	/**
sl@0	576	Constructs the 8-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor from a zero terminated
sl@0	577	string.
sl@0	578
sl@0	579	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which
sl@0	580	is created as part of this object.
sl@0	581
sl@0	582	The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer descriptor's
sl@0	583	data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the
sl@0	584	string, excluding the zero terminator.
sl@0	585
sl@0	586	@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
sl@0	587
sl@0	588	@panic USER 20, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	589	greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	590	*/
sl@0	591	{}
sl@0	592
sl@0	593
sl@0	594
sl@0	595
sl@0	596	template <TInt S>
sl@0	597	inline TBufC8<S>::TBufC8(const TDesC8 &aDes)
sl@0	598	: TBufCBase8(aDes,S)
sl@0	599	/**
sl@0	600	Constructs the 8-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor from any
sl@0	601	existing descriptor.
sl@0	602
sl@0	603	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which
sl@0	604	is created as part of this object.
sl@0	605
sl@0	606	Data is copied from the source descriptor into this buffer descriptor and
sl@0	607	the length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the
sl@0	608	source descriptor.
sl@0	609
sl@0	610	@param aDes The source 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	611
sl@0	612	@panic USER 20, if the length of the source descriptor is
sl@0	613	greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	614	*/
sl@0	615	{}
sl@0	616
sl@0	617
sl@0	618
sl@0	619
sl@0	620	template <TInt S>
sl@0	621	inline TBufC8<S> &TBufC8<S>::operator=(const TUint8 *aString)
sl@0	622	/**
sl@0	623	Copies data into this descriptor, replacing any existing data.
sl@0	624
sl@0	625	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	626
sl@0	627	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	628
sl@0	629	@return A reference to this descriptor.
sl@0	630
sl@0	631	@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	632	greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	633	*/
sl@0	634	{Copy(aString,S);return(*this);}
sl@0	635
sl@0	636
sl@0	637
sl@0	638
sl@0	639	template <TInt S>
sl@0	640	inline TBufC8<S> &TBufC8<S>::operator=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
sl@0	641	/**
sl@0	642	Copies data into this descriptor, replacing any existing data.
sl@0	643
sl@0	644	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	645
sl@0	646	@param aDes An 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	647
sl@0	648	@return A reference to this descriptor.
sl@0	649
sl@0	650	@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is
sl@0	651	greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	652	*/
sl@0	653	{Copy(aDes,S);return(*this);}
sl@0	654
sl@0	655
sl@0	656
sl@0	657
sl@0	658	template <TInt S>
sl@0	659	inline TPtr8 TBufC8<S>::Des()
sl@0	660	/**
sl@0	661	Creates and returns an 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor for the data
sl@0	662	represented by this 8-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	663
sl@0	664	The content of a non-modifiable buffer descriptor normally cannot be altered,
sl@0	665	other than by complete replacement of the data. Creating a modifiable pointer
sl@0	666	descriptor provides a way of changing the data.
sl@0	667
sl@0	668	The modifiable pointer descriptor is set to point to this non-modifiable buffer
sl@0	669	descriptor's data.
sl@0	670
sl@0	671	The length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the length of this
sl@0	672	non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	673
sl@0	674	The maximum length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the value
sl@0	675	of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	676
sl@0	677	When data is modified through this new pointer descriptor, the lengths of
sl@0	678	both it and this constant buffer descriptor are changed.
sl@0	679
sl@0	680	@return An 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor representing the data in this
sl@0	681	8-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	682	*/
sl@0	683	{return DoDes(S);}
sl@0	684
sl@0	685
sl@0	686
sl@0	687
sl@0	688	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	689	// Class HBufC8
sl@0	690	inline HBufC8 &HBufC8::operator=(const HBufC8 &aLcb)
sl@0	691	/**
sl@0	692	Copies data into this 8-bit heap descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	693
sl@0	694	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	695
sl@0	696	Note that the maximum length of this (target) descriptor is the length
sl@0	697	of the descriptor buffer in the allocated host heap cell; this may be greater
sl@0	698	than the maximum length specified when this descriptor was created or
sl@0	699	last re-allocated.
sl@0	700
sl@0	701	@param aLcb The source 8-bit heap descriptor.
sl@0	702
sl@0	703	@return A reference to this 8-bit heap descriptor.
sl@0	704
sl@0	705	@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aLcb is greater than the
sl@0	706	maximum length of this (target) descriptor
sl@0	707	*/
sl@0	708	{return *this=static_cast<const TDesC8&>(aLcb);}
sl@0	709
sl@0	710
sl@0	711
sl@0	712
sl@0	713	// Class RBuf8
sl@0	714	inline RBuf8& RBuf8::operator=(const TUint8* aString)
sl@0	715	/**
sl@0	716	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	717
sl@0	718	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	719
sl@0	720	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	721
sl@0	722	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	723
sl@0	724	@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	725	greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	726	*/
sl@0	727	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
sl@0	728
sl@0	729
sl@0	730
sl@0	731
sl@0	732	inline RBuf8& RBuf8::operator=(const TDesC8& aDes)
sl@0	733	/**
sl@0	734	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	735
sl@0	736	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	737
sl@0	738	@param aDes An 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	739
sl@0	740	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	741
sl@0	742	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	743	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	744	*/
sl@0	745	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	746
sl@0	747
sl@0	748
sl@0	749
sl@0	750	inline RBuf8& RBuf8::operator=(const RBuf8& aDes)
sl@0	751	/**
sl@0	752	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	753
sl@0	754	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	755
sl@0	756	@param aDes A 8-bit buffer descriptor.
sl@0	757
sl@0	758	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	759
sl@0	760	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	761	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	762	*/
sl@0	763	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	764
sl@0	765
sl@0	766
sl@0	767
sl@0	768	/**
sl@0	769	Creates an 8-bit resizable buffer descriptor that has been initialised with
sl@0	770	data from the specified read stream; leaves on failure.
sl@0	771
sl@0	772	Data is assigned to the new descriptor from the specified stream.
sl@0	773	This variant assumes that the stream contains the length of the data followed
sl@0	774	by the data itself.
sl@0	775
sl@0	776	The function is implemented by calling the HBufC8::NewL(RReadStream&,TInt)
sl@0	777	variant and then assigning the resulting heap descriptor using
sl@0	778	the RBuf8::Assign(HBufC8*) variant. The comments that describe
sl@0	779	the HBufC8::NewL() variant also apply to this RBuf8::CreateL() function.
sl@0	780
sl@0	781	The function may leave with one of the system-wide error codes, specifically
sl@0	782	KErrOverflow, if the length of the data as read from the stream is greater than
sl@0	783	the upper limit as specified by the aMaxLength parameter.
sl@0	784
sl@0	785	@param aStream The stream from which the data length and the data to be
sl@0	786	assigned to the new descriptor, are taken.
sl@0	787	@param aMaxLength The upper limit on the length of data that the descriptor is
sl@0	788	to represent. The value of this parameter must be non-negative
sl@0	789	otherwise the underlying function will panic.
sl@0	790	*/
sl@0	791	inline void RBuf8::CreateL(RReadStream &aStream,TInt aMaxLength)
sl@0	792	{
sl@0	793	Assign(HBufC8::NewL(aStream,aMaxLength));
sl@0	794	}
sl@0	795	#endif
sl@0	796
sl@0	797
sl@0	798
sl@0	799
sl@0	800	// Class TDes8
sl@0	801	inline TDes8 &TDes8::operator=(const TUint8 *aString)
sl@0	802	/**
sl@0	803	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	804
sl@0	805	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	806
sl@0	807	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	808
sl@0	809	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	810
sl@0	811	@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	812	greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	813	*/
sl@0	814	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
sl@0	815
sl@0	816
sl@0	817
sl@0	818
sl@0	819	inline TDes8 &TDes8::operator=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
sl@0	820	/**
sl@0	821	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	822
sl@0	823	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	824
sl@0	825	@param aDes An 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	826
sl@0	827	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	828
sl@0	829	@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	830	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	831	*/
sl@0	832	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	833
sl@0	834
sl@0	835
sl@0	836
sl@0	837	inline TDes8 &TDes8::operator=(const TDes8 &aDes)
sl@0	838	/**
sl@0	839	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	840
sl@0	841	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	842
sl@0	843	@param aDes An 8-bit modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	844
sl@0	845	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	846
sl@0	847	@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	848	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	849	*/
sl@0	850	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	851
sl@0	852
sl@0	853
sl@0	854
sl@0	855	inline TDes8 &TDes8::operator+=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
sl@0	856	/**
sl@0	857	Appends data onto the end of this descriptor's data and returns a reference
sl@0	858	to this descriptor.
sl@0	859
sl@0	860	The length of this descriptor is incremented to reflect the new content.
sl@0	861
sl@0	862	@param aDes An-8 bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be appended.
sl@0	863
sl@0	864	@return A reference to this descriptor.
sl@0	865
sl@0	866	@panic USER 23, if the resulting length of this descriptor is greater than its
sl@0	867	maximum length.
sl@0	868	*/
sl@0	869	{Append(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	870
sl@0	871
sl@0	872
sl@0	873
sl@0	874	inline const TUint8 &TDes8::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
sl@0	875	/**
sl@0	876	Gets a const reference to a single data item within this descriptor's data.
sl@0	877
sl@0	878	@param anIndex The position of the data item within this descriptor's data.
sl@0	879	This is an offset value; a zero value refers to the leftmost
sl@0	880	data position.
sl@0	881
sl@0	882	@return A const reference to the data item at the specified position.
sl@0	883
sl@0	884	@panic USER 21, if anIndex is negative or is greater than or equal to the
sl@0	885	current length of this descriptor.
sl@0	886	*/
sl@0	887	{return(AtC(anIndex));}
sl@0	888
sl@0	889
sl@0	890
sl@0	891
sl@0	892	inline TUint8 &TDes8::operator[](TInt anIndex)
sl@0	893	/**
sl@0	894	Gets a non-const reference to a single data item within this descriptor's
sl@0	895	data.
sl@0	896
sl@0	897	@param anIndex The position of the data item within this descriptor's data.
sl@0	898	This is an offset value; a zero value refers to the leftmost
sl@0	899	data position.
sl@0	900
sl@0	901	@return A non-const reference to the data item at the specified position.
sl@0	902
sl@0	903	@panic USER 21, if anIndex is negative or is greater than or equal to the
sl@0	904	current length of this descriptor.
sl@0	905	*/
sl@0	906	{return((TUint8 &)AtC(anIndex));}
sl@0	907
sl@0	908
sl@0	909
sl@0	910
sl@0	911	inline TInt TDes8::MaxLength() const
sl@0	912	/**
sl@0	913	Gets the maximum length of the descriptor.
sl@0	914
sl@0	915	This is the upper limit for the number of 8-bit values or data items that
sl@0	916	the descriptor can represent.
sl@0	917
sl@0	918	@return The maximum length of data that the descriptor can represent.
sl@0	919	*/
sl@0	920	{return(iMaxLength);}
sl@0	921
sl@0	922
sl@0	923
sl@0	924
sl@0	925	inline TInt TDes8::MaxSize() const
sl@0	926	/**
sl@0	927	Gets the maximum size of the descriptor.
sl@0	928
sl@0	929	This is the upper limit for the number of bytes which the data represented by
sl@0	930	the descriptor can occupy.
sl@0	931
sl@0	932	@return The maximum size of the descriptor data.
sl@0	933	*/
sl@0	934	{return(iMaxLength);}
sl@0	935
sl@0	936
sl@0	937
sl@0	938
sl@0	939	inline TUint8 * TDes8::WPtr() const
sl@0	940	{return((TUint8 *)Ptr());}
sl@0	941
sl@0	942
sl@0	943
sl@0	944
sl@0	945	// Class TPtr8
sl@0	946	inline TPtr8 &TPtr8::operator=(const TUint8 *aString)
sl@0	947	/**
sl@0	948	Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing any
sl@0	949	existing data.
sl@0	950
sl@0	951	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	952
sl@0	953	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	954
sl@0	955	@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	956
sl@0	957	@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	958	greater than the maximum length of this descriptor.
sl@0	959	*/
sl@0	960	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
sl@0	961
sl@0	962
sl@0	963
sl@0	964
sl@0	965	inline TPtr8 &TPtr8::operator=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
sl@0	966	/**
sl@0	967	Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing any
sl@0	968	existing data.
sl@0	969
sl@0	970	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	971
sl@0	972	@param aDes An 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor whose data is to be copied
sl@0	973	into this descriptor.
sl@0	974
sl@0	975	@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	976
sl@0	977	@panic USER 23, if the length of aDes is greater than the maximum
sl@0	978	length of this descriptor.
sl@0	979	*/
sl@0	980	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	981
sl@0	982
sl@0	983
sl@0	984
sl@0	985	inline TPtr8 &TPtr8::operator=(const TPtr8 &aDes)
sl@0	986	/**
sl@0	987	Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing any
sl@0	988	existing data.
sl@0	989
sl@0	990	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	991
sl@0	992	@param aDes An 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor whose data is to be copied
sl@0	993	into this descriptor.
sl@0	994
sl@0	995	@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	996
sl@0	997	@panic USER 23, if the length of aDes is greater than the maximum
sl@0	998	length of this descriptor.
sl@0	999	*/
sl@0	1000	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	1001
sl@0	1002
sl@0	1003
sl@0	1004
sl@0	1005	inline void TPtr8::Set(TUint8 *aBuf,TInt aLength,TInt aMaxLength)
sl@0	1006	/**
sl@0	1007	Sets the 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor to point to the specified location
sl@0	1008	in memory, whether in RAM or ROM.
sl@0	1009
sl@0	1010	The length of the descriptor and its maximum length are set to the specified
sl@0	1011	values.
sl@0	1012
sl@0	1013	@param aBuf A pointer to the location that the descriptor is to represent.
sl@0	1014	@param aLength The length of the descriptor.
sl@0	1015	@param aMaxLength The maximum length of the descriptor.
sl@0	1016
sl@0	1017	@panic USER 20, if aLength is negative or is greater than the maximum length of
sl@0	1018	this descriptor.
sl@0	1019	@panic USER 30, if aMaxLength is negative.
sl@0	1020	*/
sl@0	1021	{new(this) TPtr8(aBuf,aLength,aMaxLength);}
sl@0	1022
sl@0	1023
sl@0	1024
sl@0	1025
sl@0	1026	inline void TPtr8::Set(const TPtr8 &aPtr)
sl@0	1027	/**
sl@0	1028	Sets the 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor from an existing 8-bit modifiable
sl@0	1029	pointer descriptor.
sl@0	1030
sl@0	1031	It is set to point to the same data, is given the same length and the same
sl@0	1032	maximum length as the source pointer descriptor.
sl@0	1033
sl@0	1034	@param aPtr The source 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	1035	*/
sl@0	1036	{new(this) TPtr8(aPtr);}
sl@0	1037
sl@0	1038
sl@0	1039
sl@0	1040
sl@0	1041	// Template class TBuf8
sl@0	1042	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1043	inline TBuf8<S>::TBuf8()
sl@0	1044	: TBufBase8(S)
sl@0	1045	/**
sl@0	1046	Constructs an empty 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1047
sl@0	1048	It contains no data.
sl@0	1049
sl@0	1050	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is created
sl@0	1051	as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	1052	*/
sl@0	1053	{}
sl@0	1054
sl@0	1055
sl@0	1056
sl@0	1057
sl@0	1058	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1059	inline TBuf8<S>::TBuf8(TInt aLength)
sl@0	1060	: TBufBase8(aLength,S)
sl@0	1061	/**
sl@0	1062	Constructs an empty 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor and sets the its length
sl@0	1063	to the specified value.
sl@0	1064
sl@0	1065	No data is assigned to the descriptor.
sl@0	1066
sl@0	1067	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is created
sl@0	1068	as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	1069
sl@0	1070	@param aLength The length of this modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1071
sl@0	1072	@panic USER 20, if aLength is negative or is greater than the
sl@0	1073	value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	1074	*/
sl@0	1075	{}
sl@0	1076
sl@0	1077
sl@0	1078
sl@0	1079
sl@0	1080	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1081	inline TBuf8<S>::TBuf8(const TUint8 *aString)
sl@0	1082	: TBufBase8(aString,S)
sl@0	1083	/**
sl@0	1084	Constructs the 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from a
sl@0	1085	zero terminated string.
sl@0	1086
sl@0	1087	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that
sl@0	1088	is created as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	1089
sl@0	1090	The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer
sl@0	1091	descriptor's data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the
sl@0	1092	length of the string, excluding the zero terminator.
sl@0	1093
sl@0	1094	@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
sl@0	1095
sl@0	1096	@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
sl@0	1097	is greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	1098	*/
sl@0	1099	{}
sl@0	1100
sl@0	1101
sl@0	1102
sl@0	1103
sl@0	1104	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1105	inline TBuf8<S>::TBuf8(const TDesC8 &aDes)
sl@0	1106	: TBufBase8(aDes,S)
sl@0	1107	/**
sl@0	1108	Constructs the 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from any existing
sl@0	1109	8-bit descriptor.
sl@0	1110
sl@0	1111	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created
sl@0	1112	as part of this object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	1113
sl@0	1114	Data is copied from the source descriptor into this modifiable buffer
sl@0	1115	descriptor and the length of this modifiable buffer descriptor is set to
sl@0	1116	the length of the source descriptor.
sl@0	1117
sl@0	1118	@param aDes The source 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	1119
sl@0	1120	@panic USER 23, if the length of the source descriptor is greater than the
sl@0	1121	value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	1122	*/
sl@0	1123	{}
sl@0	1124
sl@0	1125
sl@0	1126
sl@0	1127
sl@0	1128	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1129	inline TBuf8<S> &TBuf8<S>::operator=(const TUint8 *aString)
sl@0	1130	/**
sl@0	1131	Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any
sl@0	1132	existing data.
sl@0	1133
sl@0	1134	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1135
sl@0	1136	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	1137
sl@0	1138	@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1139
sl@0	1140	@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
sl@0	1141	is greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	1142	*/
sl@0	1143	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
sl@0	1144
sl@0	1145
sl@0	1146
sl@0	1147
sl@0	1148	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1149	inline TBuf8<S> &TBuf8<S>::operator=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
sl@0	1150	/**
sl@0	1151	Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any
sl@0	1152	existing data.
sl@0	1153
sl@0	1154	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1155
sl@0	1156	@param aDes An 8 bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	1157
sl@0	1158	@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1159
sl@0	1160	@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	1161	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	1162	*/
sl@0	1163	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	1164
sl@0	1165
sl@0	1166
sl@0	1167
sl@0	1168	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1169	inline TBuf8<S>& TBuf8<S>::operator=(const TBuf8<S>& aBuf)
sl@0	1170	/**
sl@0	1171	Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor replacing any
sl@0	1172	existing data.
sl@0	1173
sl@0	1174	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1175
sl@0	1176	@param aBuf The source 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor with the same
sl@0	1177	template value.
sl@0	1178
sl@0	1179	@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1180	*/
sl@0	1181	{Copy(aBuf);return *this;}
sl@0	1182
sl@0	1183
sl@0	1184
sl@0	1185
sl@0	1186	// Template class TAlignedBuf8
sl@0	1187	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1188	inline TAlignedBuf8<S>::TAlignedBuf8()
sl@0	1189	: TBufBase8(S)
sl@0	1190	/**
sl@0	1191	Constructs an empty 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1192
sl@0	1193	It contains no data.
sl@0	1194
sl@0	1195	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is created
sl@0	1196	as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	1197	*/
sl@0	1198	{}
sl@0	1199
sl@0	1200
sl@0	1201
sl@0	1202
sl@0	1203	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1204	inline TAlignedBuf8<S>::TAlignedBuf8(TInt aLength)
sl@0	1205	: TBufBase8(aLength,S)
sl@0	1206	/**
sl@0	1207	Constructs an empty 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor and sets the its length
sl@0	1208	to the specified value.
sl@0	1209
sl@0	1210	No data is assigned to the descriptor.
sl@0	1211
sl@0	1212	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is created
sl@0	1213	as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	1214
sl@0	1215	@param aLength The length of this modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1216
sl@0	1217	@panic USER 20, if aLength is negative or is greater than the
sl@0	1218	value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	1219	*/
sl@0	1220	{}
sl@0	1221
sl@0	1222
sl@0	1223
sl@0	1224
sl@0	1225	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1226	inline TAlignedBuf8<S>::TAlignedBuf8(const TUint8 *aString)
sl@0	1227	: TBufBase8(aString,S)
sl@0	1228	/**
sl@0	1229	Constructs the 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from a
sl@0	1230	zero terminated string.
sl@0	1231
sl@0	1232	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that
sl@0	1233	is created as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	1234
sl@0	1235	The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer
sl@0	1236	descriptor's data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the
sl@0	1237	length of the string, excluding the zero terminator.
sl@0	1238
sl@0	1239	@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
sl@0	1240
sl@0	1241	@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
sl@0	1242	is greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	1243	*/
sl@0	1244	{}
sl@0	1245
sl@0	1246
sl@0	1247
sl@0	1248
sl@0	1249	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1250	inline TAlignedBuf8<S>::TAlignedBuf8(const TDesC8 &aDes)
sl@0	1251	: TBufBase8(aDes,S)
sl@0	1252	/**
sl@0	1253	Constructs the 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from any existing
sl@0	1254	8-bit descriptor.
sl@0	1255
sl@0	1256	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created
sl@0	1257	as part of this object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	1258
sl@0	1259	Data is copied from the source descriptor into this modifiable buffer
sl@0	1260	descriptor and the length of this modifiable buffer descriptor is set to
sl@0	1261	the length of the source descriptor.
sl@0	1262
sl@0	1263	@param aDes The source 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	1264
sl@0	1265	@panic USER 23, if the length of the source descriptor is greater than the
sl@0	1266	value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	1267	*/
sl@0	1268	{}
sl@0	1269
sl@0	1270
sl@0	1271
sl@0	1272
sl@0	1273	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1274	inline TAlignedBuf8<S> &TAlignedBuf8<S>::operator=(const TUint8 *aString)
sl@0	1275	/**
sl@0	1276	Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any
sl@0	1277	existing data.
sl@0	1278
sl@0	1279	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1280
sl@0	1281	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	1282
sl@0	1283	@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1284
sl@0	1285	@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
sl@0	1286	is greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	1287	*/
sl@0	1288	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
sl@0	1289
sl@0	1290
sl@0	1291
sl@0	1292
sl@0	1293	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1294	inline TAlignedBuf8<S> &TAlignedBuf8<S>::operator=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
sl@0	1295	/**
sl@0	1296	Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any
sl@0	1297	existing data.
sl@0	1298
sl@0	1299	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1300
sl@0	1301	@param aDes An 8 bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	1302
sl@0	1303	@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1304
sl@0	1305	@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	1306	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	1307	*/
sl@0	1308	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	1309
sl@0	1310
sl@0	1311
sl@0	1312
sl@0	1313	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1314	inline TAlignedBuf8<S>& TAlignedBuf8<S>::operator=(const TAlignedBuf8<S>& aBuf)
sl@0	1315	/**
sl@0	1316	Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor replacing any
sl@0	1317	existing data.
sl@0	1318
sl@0	1319	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1320
sl@0	1321	@param aBuf The source 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor with the same
sl@0	1322	template value.
sl@0	1323
sl@0	1324	@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1325	*/
sl@0	1326	{Copy(aBuf);return *this;}
sl@0	1327
sl@0	1328
sl@0	1329
sl@0	1330
sl@0	1331	// Template class TLitC8
sl@0	1332	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1333	inline const TDesC8* TLitC8<S>::operator&() const
sl@0	1334	/**
sl@0	1335	Returns a const TDesC8 type pointer.
sl@0	1336
sl@0	1337	@return A descriptor type pointer to this literal.
sl@0	1338	*/
sl@0	1339	{return REINTERPRET_CAST(const TDesC8*,this);}
sl@0	1340
sl@0	1341
sl@0	1342
sl@0	1343
sl@0	1344	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1345	inline const TDesC8& TLitC8<S>::operator()() const
sl@0	1346	/**
sl@0	1347	Returns a const TDesC8 type reference.
sl@0	1348
sl@0	1349	@return A descriptor type reference to this literal
sl@0	1350	*/
sl@0	1351	{return *operator&();}
sl@0	1352
sl@0	1353
sl@0	1354
sl@0	1355
sl@0	1356	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1357	inline TLitC8<S>::operator const TDesC8&() const
sl@0	1358	/**
sl@0	1359	Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC8<TInt> type is passed to a function
sl@0	1360	which is prototyped to take a const TDesC8& type.
sl@0	1361	*/
sl@0	1362	{return *operator&();}
sl@0	1363
sl@0	1364
sl@0	1365
sl@0	1366	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1367	inline TLitC8<S>::operator const __TRefDesC8() const
sl@0	1368	/**
sl@0	1369	Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC8<TInt> type is passed to a function
sl@0	1370	which is prototyped to take a const TRefByValue<const TDesC8> type.
sl@0	1371
sl@0	1372	@see __TRefDesC8
sl@0	1373	*/
sl@0	1374	{return *operator&();}
sl@0	1375
sl@0	1376
sl@0	1377
sl@0	1378
sl@0	1379	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	1380	// Class TDesC16
sl@0	1381	inline TBool TDesC16::operator<(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
sl@0	1382	/**
sl@0	1383	Determines whether this descriptor's data is less than the specified descriptor's
sl@0	1384	data.
sl@0	1385
sl@0	1386	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	1387
sl@0	1388	@param aDes The 16-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	1389	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	1390
sl@0	1391	@return True if less than, false otherwise.
sl@0	1392
sl@0	1393	@see TDesC16::Compare
sl@0	1394	*/
sl@0	1395	{return(Compare(aDes)<0);}
sl@0	1396
sl@0	1397
sl@0	1398
sl@0	1399
sl@0	1400	inline TBool TDesC16::operator<=(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
sl@0	1401	/**
sl@0	1402	Determines whether this descriptor's data is less than or equal
sl@0	1403	to the specified descriptor's data.
sl@0	1404
sl@0	1405	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	1406
sl@0	1407	@param aDes The 16-bit non- modifiable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	1408	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	1409
sl@0	1410	@return True if less than or equal, false otherwise.
sl@0	1411
sl@0	1412	@see TDesC16::Compare
sl@0	1413	*/
sl@0	1414	{return(Compare(aDes)<=0);}
sl@0	1415
sl@0	1416
sl@0	1417
sl@0	1418
sl@0	1419	inline TBool TDesC16::operator>(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
sl@0	1420	/**
sl@0	1421	Determines whether this descriptor's data is greater than the specified
sl@0	1422	descriptor's data.
sl@0	1423
sl@0	1424	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	1425
sl@0	1426	@param aDes The 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	1427	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	1428
sl@0	1429	@return True if greater than, false otherwise.
sl@0	1430
sl@0	1431	@see TDesC16::Compare
sl@0	1432	*/
sl@0	1433	{return(Compare(aDes)>0);}
sl@0	1434
sl@0	1435
sl@0	1436
sl@0	1437
sl@0	1438	inline TBool TDesC16::operator>=(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
sl@0	1439	/**
sl@0	1440	Determines whether this descriptor's data is greater than or equal to the
sl@0	1441	specified descriptor's data.
sl@0	1442
sl@0	1443	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	1444
sl@0	1445	@param aDes The 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	1446	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	1447
sl@0	1448	@return True if greater than or equal, false otherwise.
sl@0	1449
sl@0	1450	@see TDesC16::Compare
sl@0	1451	*/
sl@0	1452	{return(Compare(aDes)>=0);}
sl@0	1453
sl@0	1454
sl@0	1455
sl@0	1456
sl@0	1457	inline TBool TDesC16::operator==(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
sl@0	1458	/**
sl@0	1459	Determines whether this descriptor's data is equal to the specified
sl@0	1460	descriptor's data.
sl@0	1461
sl@0	1462	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	1463
sl@0	1464	@param aDes The 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	1465	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	1466
sl@0	1467	@return True if equal, false otherwise.
sl@0	1468
sl@0	1469	@see TDesC16::Compare
sl@0	1470	*/
sl@0	1471	{return(Compare(aDes)==0);}
sl@0	1472
sl@0	1473
sl@0	1474
sl@0	1475
sl@0	1476	inline TBool TDesC16::operator!=(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
sl@0	1477	/**
sl@0	1478	Determines whether this descriptor's data is not equal to the specified
sl@0	1479	descriptor's data.
sl@0	1480
sl@0	1481	The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
sl@0	1482
sl@0	1483	@param aDes The 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be compared
sl@0	1484	with this descriptor's data.
sl@0	1485
sl@0	1486	@return True if not equal, false otherwise.
sl@0	1487
sl@0	1488	@see TDesC16::Compare
sl@0	1489	*/
sl@0	1490	{return(Compare(aDes)!=0);}
sl@0	1491
sl@0	1492
sl@0	1493
sl@0	1494
sl@0	1495	inline const TUint16 &TDesC16::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
sl@0	1496	/**
sl@0	1497	Gets a reference to a single data item within this descriptor's data.
sl@0	1498
sl@0	1499	@param anIndex The position of the individual data item within the descriptor's
sl@0	1500	data. This is an offset value; a zero value refers to the
sl@0	1501	leftmost data position.
sl@0	1502
sl@0	1503	@return A reference to the data item.
sl@0	1504
sl@0	1505	@panic USER 9, if anIndex is negative or greater than or equal to the current
sl@0	1506	length of the descriptor.
sl@0	1507	*/
sl@0	1508	{return(AtC(anIndex));}
sl@0	1509
sl@0	1510
sl@0	1511
sl@0	1512
sl@0	1513	inline TInt TDesC16::Length() const
sl@0	1514	/**
sl@0	1515	Gets the length of the data.
sl@0	1516
sl@0	1517	This is the number of 16-bit values or data items represented by the descriptor.
sl@0	1518
sl@0	1519	@return The length of the data represented by the descriptor.
sl@0	1520	*/
sl@0	1521	{return(iLength&KMaskDesLength16);}
sl@0	1522
sl@0	1523
sl@0	1524
sl@0	1525
sl@0	1526	inline TInt TDesC16::Size() const
sl@0	1527	/**
sl@0	1528	Gets the size of the data.
sl@0	1529
sl@0	1530	This is the number of bytes occupied by the data represented by the descriptor.
sl@0	1531
sl@0	1532	@return The size of the data represented by the descriptor. This is always
sl@0	1533	twice the length.
sl@0	1534	*/
sl@0	1535	{return(Length()<<1);}
sl@0	1536
sl@0	1537
sl@0	1538
sl@0	1539
sl@0	1540	inline void TDesC16::DoSetLength(TInt aLength)
sl@0	1541	{iLength=(iLength&(~KMaskDesLength16))\|aLength;}
sl@0	1542
sl@0	1543
sl@0	1544
sl@0	1545
sl@0	1546	// Class TPtrC16
sl@0	1547	inline void TPtrC16::Set(const TUint16 *aBuf,TInt aLength)
sl@0	1548	/**
sl@0	1549	Sets the 16-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor to point to the specified
sl@0	1550	location in memory, whether in RAM or ROM.
sl@0	1551
sl@0	1552	The length of the descriptor is set to the specified length.
sl@0	1553
sl@0	1554	@param aBuf A pointer to the location that the descriptor is to represent.
sl@0	1555	@param aLength The length of the descriptor. This value must be non-negative
sl@0	1556
sl@0	1557	@panic USER 17, if aLength is negative.
sl@0	1558	*/
sl@0	1559	{new(this) TPtrC16(aBuf,aLength);}
sl@0	1560
sl@0	1561
sl@0	1562
sl@0	1563
sl@0	1564	inline void TPtrC16::Set(const TDesC16 &aDes)
sl@0	1565	/**
sl@0	1566	Sets the 16-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor from the specified descriptor.
sl@0	1567
sl@0	1568	It is set to point to the same data and is given the same length.
sl@0	1569
sl@0	1570	@param aDes A reference to a 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor
sl@0	1571	*/
sl@0	1572	{new(this) TPtrC16(aDes);}
sl@0	1573
sl@0	1574
sl@0	1575
sl@0	1576
sl@0	1577	inline void TPtrC16::Set(const TPtrC16& aPtr)
sl@0	1578	{new(this) TPtrC16(aPtr);}
sl@0	1579
sl@0	1580
sl@0	1581
sl@0	1582
sl@0	1583	// class TBufCBase16
sl@0	1584	inline TPtr16 TBufCBase16::DoDes(TInt aMaxLength)
sl@0	1585	{return TPtr16(*this,aMaxLength);}
sl@0	1586
sl@0	1587
sl@0	1588
sl@0	1589
sl@0	1590	// Template class TBufC16
sl@0	1591	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1592	inline TBufC16<S>::TBufC16()
sl@0	1593	: TBufCBase16()
sl@0	1594	/**
sl@0	1595	Constructs an empty 16-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1596
sl@0	1597	It contains no data.
sl@0	1598
sl@0	1599	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which
sl@0	1600	is created as part of the buffer descriptor object.
sl@0	1601
sl@0	1602	Data can, subsequently, be assigned into this buffer descriptor using the
sl@0	1603	assignment operators.
sl@0	1604
sl@0	1605	@see TBufC16::operator=
sl@0	1606	*/
sl@0	1607	{}
sl@0	1608
sl@0	1609
sl@0	1610
sl@0	1611
sl@0	1612	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1613	inline TBufC16<S>::TBufC16(const TUint16 *aString)
sl@0	1614	: TBufCBase16(aString,S)
sl@0	1615	/**
sl@0	1616	Constructs the 16-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor from a zero terminated
sl@0	1617	string.
sl@0	1618
sl@0	1619	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which
sl@0	1620	is created as part of this object.
sl@0	1621
sl@0	1622	The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer descriptor's
sl@0	1623	data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the
sl@0	1624	string, excluding the zero terminator.
sl@0	1625
sl@0	1626	@panic USER 8, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	1627	greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	1628
sl@0	1629	@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
sl@0	1630	*/
sl@0	1631	{}
sl@0	1632
sl@0	1633
sl@0	1634
sl@0	1635
sl@0	1636	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1637	inline TBufC16<S>::TBufC16(const TDesC16 &aDes)
sl@0	1638	: TBufCBase16(aDes,S)
sl@0	1639	/**
sl@0	1640	Constructs the 16-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor from any
sl@0	1641	existing descriptor.
sl@0	1642
sl@0	1643	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which
sl@0	1644	is created as part of this object.
sl@0	1645
sl@0	1646	Data is copied from the source descriptor into this buffer descriptor and
sl@0	1647	the length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the
sl@0	1648	source descriptor.
sl@0	1649
sl@0	1650	@param aDes The source 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	1651
sl@0	1652	@panic USER 8, if the length of the source descriptor is
sl@0	1653	greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	1654	*/
sl@0	1655	{}
sl@0	1656
sl@0	1657
sl@0	1658
sl@0	1659
sl@0	1660	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1661	inline TBufC16<S> &TBufC16<S>::operator=(const TUint16 *aString)
sl@0	1662	/**
sl@0	1663	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	1664
sl@0	1665	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1666
sl@0	1667	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	1668
sl@0	1669	@return A reference to this descriptor.
sl@0	1670
sl@0	1671	@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	1672	greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	1673	*/
sl@0	1674	{Copy(aString,S);return(*this);}
sl@0	1675
sl@0	1676
sl@0	1677
sl@0	1678
sl@0	1679	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1680	inline TBufC16<S> &TBufC16<S>::operator=(const TDesC16 &aDes)
sl@0	1681	/**
sl@0	1682	Copies data into this descriptor, replacing any existing data.
sl@0	1683
sl@0	1684	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1685
sl@0	1686	@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	1687
sl@0	1688	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is
sl@0	1689	greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	1690
sl@0	1691	@return A reference to this descriptor.
sl@0	1692	*/
sl@0	1693	{Copy(aDes,S);return(*this);}
sl@0	1694
sl@0	1695
sl@0	1696
sl@0	1697
sl@0	1698	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1699	inline TPtr16 TBufC16<S>::Des()
sl@0	1700	/**
sl@0	1701	Creates and returns a 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor for the data
sl@0	1702	represented by this 16-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1703
sl@0	1704	The content of a non-modifiable buffer descriptor normally cannot be altered,
sl@0	1705	other than by complete replacement of the data. Creating a modifiable pointer
sl@0	1706	descriptor provides a way of changing the data.
sl@0	1707
sl@0	1708	The modifiable pointer descriptor is set to point to this non-modifiable buffer
sl@0	1709	descriptor's data.
sl@0	1710
sl@0	1711	The length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the length of this
sl@0	1712	non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1713
sl@0	1714	The maximum length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the value
sl@0	1715	of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	1716
sl@0	1717	When data is modified through this new pointer descriptor, the lengths of
sl@0	1718	both it and this constant buffer descriptor are changed.
sl@0	1719
sl@0	1720	@return A 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor representing the data in this
sl@0	1721	16-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	1722	*/
sl@0	1723	{return(DoDes(S));}
sl@0	1724
sl@0	1725
sl@0	1726
sl@0	1727
sl@0	1728	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	1729	// Class HBufC16
sl@0	1730	inline HBufC16 &HBufC16::operator=(const HBufC16 &aLcb)
sl@0	1731	/**
sl@0	1732	Copies data into this 16-bit heap descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	1733
sl@0	1734	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1735
sl@0	1736	Note that the maximum length of this (target) descriptor is the length
sl@0	1737	of the descriptor buffer in the allocated host heap cell; this may be greater
sl@0	1738	than the maximum length specified when this descriptor was created or
sl@0	1739	last re-allocated.
sl@0	1740
sl@0	1741	@param aLcb The source 16-bit heap descriptor.
sl@0	1742
sl@0	1743	@return A reference to this 16-bit heap descriptor.
sl@0	1744
sl@0	1745	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aLcb is greater than the
sl@0	1746	maximum length of this (target) descriptor
sl@0	1747	*/
sl@0	1748	{return *this=static_cast<const TDesC16&>(aLcb);}
sl@0	1749	#endif
sl@0	1750
sl@0	1751
sl@0	1752
sl@0	1753
sl@0	1754	// Class TDes16
sl@0	1755	inline TDes16 &TDes16::operator=(const TUint16 *aString)
sl@0	1756	/**
sl@0	1757	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	1758
sl@0	1759	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1760
sl@0	1761	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	1762
sl@0	1763	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	1764
sl@0	1765	@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	1766	greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	1767	*/
sl@0	1768	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
sl@0	1769
sl@0	1770
sl@0	1771
sl@0	1772
sl@0	1773	inline TDes16 &TDes16::operator=(const TDesC16 &aDes)
sl@0	1774	/**
sl@0	1775	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	1776
sl@0	1777	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1778
sl@0	1779	@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	1780
sl@0	1781	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	1782
sl@0	1783	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	1784	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	1785	*/
sl@0	1786	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	1787
sl@0	1788
sl@0	1789
sl@0	1790
sl@0	1791	inline TDes16 &TDes16::operator=(const TDes16 &aDes)
sl@0	1792	/**
sl@0	1793	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	1794
sl@0	1795	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1796
sl@0	1797	@param aDes A 16-bit modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	1798
sl@0	1799	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	1800
sl@0	1801	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	1802	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	1803	*/
sl@0	1804	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	1805
sl@0	1806
sl@0	1807
sl@0	1808
sl@0	1809	inline TDes16 &TDes16::operator+=(const TDesC16 &aDes)
sl@0	1810	/**
sl@0	1811	Appends data onto the end of this descriptor's data and returns a reference
sl@0	1812	to this descriptor.
sl@0	1813
sl@0	1814	The length of this descriptor is incremented to reflect the new content.
sl@0	1815
sl@0	1816	@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be appended.
sl@0	1817
sl@0	1818	@return A reference to this descriptor.
sl@0	1819
sl@0	1820	@panic USER 11, if the resulting length of this descriptor is greater than its
sl@0	1821	maximum length.
sl@0	1822	*/
sl@0	1823	{Append(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	1824
sl@0	1825
sl@0	1826
sl@0	1827
sl@0	1828	inline const TUint16 &TDes16::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
sl@0	1829	/**
sl@0	1830	Gets a const reference to a single data item within this descriptor's data.
sl@0	1831
sl@0	1832	@param anIndex The position the data item within this descriptor's data. This
sl@0	1833	is an offset value; a zero value refers to the leftmost data position.
sl@0	1834
sl@0	1835	@return A const reference to the data item at the specified position.
sl@0	1836
sl@0	1837	@panic USER 9, if anIndex is negative or is greater than or equal to the
sl@0	1838	current length of this descriptor.
sl@0	1839	*/
sl@0	1840	{return(AtC(anIndex));}
sl@0	1841
sl@0	1842
sl@0	1843
sl@0	1844
sl@0	1845	inline TUint16 &TDes16::operator[](TInt anIndex)
sl@0	1846	/**
sl@0	1847	Gets a non-const reference to a single data item within this descriptor's
sl@0	1848	data.
sl@0	1849
sl@0	1850	@param anIndex The position of the data item within this descriptor's data.
sl@0	1851	This is an offset value; a zero value refers to the leftmost
sl@0	1852	data position.
sl@0	1853
sl@0	1854	@return A non-const reference to the data item at the specified position.
sl@0	1855
sl@0	1856	@panic USER 9, if anIndex is negative or is greater than or equal to the
sl@0	1857	current length of this descriptor.
sl@0	1858	*/
sl@0	1859	{return((TUint16 &)AtC(anIndex));}
sl@0	1860
sl@0	1861
sl@0	1862
sl@0	1863
sl@0	1864	inline TInt TDes16::MaxLength() const
sl@0	1865	/**
sl@0	1866	Gets the maximum length of the descriptor.
sl@0	1867
sl@0	1868	This is the upper limit for the number of 16-bit values or data items that
sl@0	1869	the descriptor can represent.
sl@0	1870
sl@0	1871	@return The maximum length of data that the descriptor can represent.
sl@0	1872	*/
sl@0	1873	{return(iMaxLength);}
sl@0	1874
sl@0	1875
sl@0	1876
sl@0	1877
sl@0	1878	inline TInt TDes16::MaxSize() const
sl@0	1879	/**
sl@0	1880	Gets the maximum size of the descriptor.
sl@0	1881
sl@0	1882	This is the upper limit for the number of bytes which the data represented by
sl@0	1883	the descriptor can occupy.
sl@0	1884
sl@0	1885	@return The maximum size of the descriptor data.
sl@0	1886	*/
sl@0	1887	{return(iMaxLength<<1);}
sl@0	1888
sl@0	1889
sl@0	1890
sl@0	1891
sl@0	1892	inline TUint16 * TDes16::WPtr() const
sl@0	1893	{return((TUint16 *)Ptr());}
sl@0	1894
sl@0	1895
sl@0	1896
sl@0	1897
sl@0	1898	// Class TPtr16
sl@0	1899	inline TPtr16 &TPtr16::operator=(const TUint16 *aString)
sl@0	1900	/**
sl@0	1901	Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing
sl@0	1902	any existing data.
sl@0	1903
sl@0	1904	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1905
sl@0	1906	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	1907
sl@0	1908	@return A reference to this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	1909
sl@0	1910	@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	1911	greater than the maximum length of this descriptor.
sl@0	1912	*/
sl@0	1913	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
sl@0	1914
sl@0	1915
sl@0	1916
sl@0	1917
sl@0	1918	inline TPtr16 &TPtr16::operator=(const TDesC16 &aDes)
sl@0	1919	/**
sl@0	1920	Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing any
sl@0	1921	existing data.
sl@0	1922
sl@0	1923	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1924
sl@0	1925	@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be copied
sl@0	1926	into this descriptor.
sl@0	1927
sl@0	1928	@return A reference to this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	1929
sl@0	1930	@panic USER 11, if the length of aDes is greater than the maximum
sl@0	1931	length of this descriptor.
sl@0	1932	*/
sl@0	1933	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	1934
sl@0	1935
sl@0	1936
sl@0	1937
sl@0	1938	inline TPtr16 &TPtr16::operator=(const TPtr16 &aDes)
sl@0	1939	/**
sl@0	1940	Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing any
sl@0	1941	existing data.
sl@0	1942
sl@0	1943	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	1944
sl@0	1945	@param aDes A 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor whose data is to be copied
sl@0	1946	into this descriptor.
sl@0	1947
sl@0	1948	@return A reference to this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	1949
sl@0	1950	@panic USER 11, if the length of aDes is greater than the maximum
sl@0	1951	length of this descriptor.
sl@0	1952	*/
sl@0	1953	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	1954
sl@0	1955
sl@0	1956
sl@0	1957
sl@0	1958	inline void TPtr16::Set(TUint16 *aBuf,TInt aLength,TInt aMaxLength)
sl@0	1959	/**
sl@0	1960	Sets the 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor to point to the specified location
sl@0	1961	in memory, whether in RAM or ROM.
sl@0	1962
sl@0	1963	The length of the descriptor and its maximum length are set to the specified
sl@0	1964	values.
sl@0	1965
sl@0	1966	@param aBuf A pointer to the location that the descriptor is to represent.
sl@0	1967	@param aLength The length of the descriptor.
sl@0	1968	@param aMaxLength The maximum length of the descriptor.
sl@0	1969
sl@0	1970	@panic USER 8, if aLength is negative or is greater than the maximum length of
sl@0	1971	this descriptor.
sl@0	1972	@panic USER 18, if aMaxLength is negative.
sl@0	1973	*/
sl@0	1974	{new(this) TPtr16(aBuf,aLength,aMaxLength);}
sl@0	1975
sl@0	1976
sl@0	1977
sl@0	1978
sl@0	1979	inline void TPtr16::Set(const TPtr16 &aPtr)
sl@0	1980	/**
sl@0	1981	Sets the 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor from an existing
sl@0	1982	16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	1983
sl@0	1984	It is set to point to the same data, is given the same length and the same
sl@0	1985	maximum length as the source pointer descriptor.
sl@0	1986
sl@0	1987	@param aPtr The source 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	1988	*/
sl@0	1989	{new(this) TPtr16(aPtr);}
sl@0	1990
sl@0	1991
sl@0	1992
sl@0	1993
sl@0	1994	// Template class TBuf16
sl@0	1995	template <TInt S>
sl@0	1996	inline TBuf16<S>::TBuf16()
sl@0	1997	: TBufBase16(S)
sl@0	1998	/**
sl@0	1999	Constructs an empty 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2000
sl@0	2001	It contains no data.
sl@0	2002
sl@0	2003	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created
sl@0	2004	as part of the object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	2005	*/
sl@0	2006	{}
sl@0	2007
sl@0	2008
sl@0	2009
sl@0	2010
sl@0	2011	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2012	inline TBuf16<S>::TBuf16(TInt aLength)
sl@0	2013	: TBufBase16(aLength,S)
sl@0	2014	/**
sl@0	2015	Constructs an empty 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor and sets the its length
sl@0	2016	to the specified value.
sl@0	2017
sl@0	2018	No data is assigned to the descriptor.
sl@0	2019
sl@0	2020	The integer template parameter defines the size of the data area created as
sl@0	2021	part of the object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	2022
sl@0	2023	@param aLength The length of this modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2024
sl@0	2025	@panic USER 8, if aLength is negative or is greater than the
sl@0	2026	value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	2027	*/
sl@0	2028	{}
sl@0	2029
sl@0	2030
sl@0	2031
sl@0	2032
sl@0	2033	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2034	inline TBuf16<S>::TBuf16(const TUint16 *aString)
sl@0	2035	: TBufBase16(aString,S)
sl@0	2036	/**
sl@0	2037	Constructs the 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from
sl@0	2038	a zero terminated string.
sl@0	2039
sl@0	2040	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is
sl@0	2041	created as part of this object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	2042
sl@0	2043	The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer
sl@0	2044	descriptor's data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the
sl@0	2045	length of the string, excluding the zero terminator.
sl@0	2046
sl@0	2047	@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
sl@0	2048
sl@0	2049	@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
sl@0	2050	is greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	2051	*/
sl@0	2052	{}
sl@0	2053
sl@0	2054
sl@0	2055
sl@0	2056
sl@0	2057	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2058	inline TBuf16<S>::TBuf16(const TDesC16 &aDes)
sl@0	2059	: TBufBase16(aDes,S)
sl@0	2060	/**
sl@0	2061	Constructs the 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from any existing
sl@0	2062	16-bit descriptor.
sl@0	2063
sl@0	2064	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created
sl@0	2065	as part of this object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	2066
sl@0	2067	Data is copied from the source descriptor into this modifiable buffer descriptor
sl@0	2068	and the length of this modifiable buffer descriptor is set to the length of
sl@0	2069	the source descriptor.
sl@0	2070
sl@0	2071	@param aDes The source 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	2072
sl@0	2073	@panic USER 11, if the length of the source descriptor is greater than the
sl@0	2074	value of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	2075	*/
sl@0	2076	{}
sl@0	2077
sl@0	2078
sl@0	2079
sl@0	2080
sl@0	2081	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2082	inline TBuf16<S> &TBuf16<S>::operator=(const TUint16 *aString)
sl@0	2083	/**
sl@0	2084	Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any
sl@0	2085	existing data.
sl@0	2086
sl@0	2087	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	2088
sl@0	2089	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	2090
sl@0	2091	@return A reference to this descriptor.
sl@0	2092
sl@0	2093	@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
sl@0	2094	is greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	2095	*/
sl@0	2096	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
sl@0	2097
sl@0	2098
sl@0	2099
sl@0	2100
sl@0	2101	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2102	inline TBuf16<S> &TBuf16<S>::operator=(const TDesC16 &aDes)
sl@0	2103	/**
sl@0	2104	Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable descriptor, replacing any
sl@0	2105	existing data.
sl@0	2106
sl@0	2107	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	2108
sl@0	2109	@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	2110
sl@0	2111	@return A reference to this descriptor.
sl@0	2112
sl@0	2113	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	2114	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	2115	*/
sl@0	2116	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	2117
sl@0	2118
sl@0	2119
sl@0	2120
sl@0	2121	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2122	inline TBuf16<S>& TBuf16<S>::operator=(const TBuf16<S>& aBuf)
sl@0	2123	/**
sl@0	2124	Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor replacing any
sl@0	2125	existing data.
sl@0	2126
sl@0	2127	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	2128
sl@0	2129	@param aBuf The source 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor with the same
sl@0	2130	template value.
sl@0	2131
sl@0	2132	@return A reference to this 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2133
sl@0	2134	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	2135	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	2136	*/
sl@0	2137	{Copy(aBuf);return *this;}
sl@0	2138
sl@0	2139
sl@0	2140	// Class RBuf16
sl@0	2141	inline RBuf16& RBuf16::operator=(const TUint16* aString)
sl@0	2142	/**
sl@0	2143	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	2144
sl@0	2145	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	2146
sl@0	2147	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	2148
sl@0	2149	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	2150
sl@0	2151	@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	2152	greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	2153	*/
sl@0	2154	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
sl@0	2155
sl@0	2156
sl@0	2157
sl@0	2158
sl@0	2159	inline RBuf16& RBuf16::operator=(const TDesC16& aDes)
sl@0	2160	/**
sl@0	2161	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	2162
sl@0	2163	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	2164
sl@0	2165	@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	2166
sl@0	2167	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	2168
sl@0	2169	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	2170	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	2171	*/
sl@0	2172	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	2173
sl@0	2174
sl@0	2175
sl@0	2176
sl@0	2177	inline RBuf16& RBuf16::operator=(const RBuf16& aDes)
sl@0	2178	/**
sl@0	2179	Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
sl@0	2180
sl@0	2181	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	2182
sl@0	2183	@param aDes A 16-bit buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2184
sl@0	2185	@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
sl@0	2186
sl@0	2187	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	2188	maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
sl@0	2189	*/
sl@0	2190	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	2191
sl@0	2192
sl@0	2193
sl@0	2194
sl@0	2195	/**
sl@0	2196	Creates a 16-bit resizable buffer descriptor that has been initialised with
sl@0	2197	data from the specified read stream; leaves on failure.
sl@0	2198
sl@0	2199	Data is assigned to the new descriptor from the specified stream.
sl@0	2200	This variant assumes that the stream contains the length of the data followed
sl@0	2201	by the data itself.
sl@0	2202
sl@0	2203	The function is implemented by calling the HBufC16::NewL(RReadStream&,TInt)
sl@0	2204	variant and then assigning the resulting heap descriptor using
sl@0	2205	the RBuf16::Assign(HBufC16*) variant. The comments that describe
sl@0	2206	the HBufC16::NewL() variant also apply to this RBuf16::CreateL() function.
sl@0	2207
sl@0	2208	The function may leave with one of the system-wide error codes, specifically
sl@0	2209	KErrOverflow, if the length of the data as read from the stream is greater than
sl@0	2210	the upper limit as specified by the aMaxLength parameter.
sl@0	2211
sl@0	2212	@param aStream The stream from which the data length and the data to be
sl@0	2213	assigned to the new descriptor, are taken.
sl@0	2214	@param aMaxLength The upper limit on the length of data that the descriptor is
sl@0	2215	to represent. The value of this parameter must be non-negative
sl@0	2216	otherwise the underlying function will panic.
sl@0	2217	*/
sl@0	2218	inline void RBuf16::CreateL(RReadStream &aStream,TInt aMaxLength)
sl@0	2219	{
sl@0	2220	Assign(HBufC16::NewL(aStream,aMaxLength));
sl@0	2221	}
sl@0	2222
sl@0	2223
sl@0	2224	// Template class TLitC16
sl@0	2225	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2226	inline const TDesC16* TLitC16<S>::operator&() const
sl@0	2227	/**
sl@0	2228	Returns a const TDesC16 type pointer.
sl@0	2229
sl@0	2230	@return A descriptor type pointer to this literal.
sl@0	2231	*/
sl@0	2232	{return REINTERPRET_CAST(const TDesC16*,this);}
sl@0	2233
sl@0	2234
sl@0	2235
sl@0	2236
sl@0	2237	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2238	inline const TDesC16& TLitC16<S>::operator()() const
sl@0	2239	/**
sl@0	2240	Returns a const TDesC16 type reference.
sl@0	2241
sl@0	2242	@return A descriptor type reference to this literal
sl@0	2243	*/
sl@0	2244	{return *operator&();}
sl@0	2245
sl@0	2246
sl@0	2247
sl@0	2248
sl@0	2249	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2250	inline TLitC16<S>::operator const TDesC16&() const
sl@0	2251	/**
sl@0	2252	Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC16<TInt> type is passed to a function
sl@0	2253	which is prototyped to take a const TDesC16& type.
sl@0	2254	*/
sl@0	2255	{return *operator&();}
sl@0	2256
sl@0	2257
sl@0	2258
sl@0	2259
sl@0	2260	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2261	inline TLitC16<S>::operator const __TRefDesC16() const
sl@0	2262	/**
sl@0	2263	Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC16<TInt> type is passed to a function
sl@0	2264	which is prototyped to take a const TRefByValue<const TDesC16> type.
sl@0	2265
sl@0	2266	@see __TRefDesC16
sl@0	2267	*/
sl@0	2268	{return *operator&();}
sl@0	2269	#endif //__KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	2270
sl@0	2271
sl@0	2272
sl@0	2273
sl@0	2274	// Template class TBufC
sl@0	2275	#if defined(_UNICODE) && !defined(__KERNEL_MODE__)
sl@0	2276	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2277	inline TBufC<S>::TBufC()
sl@0	2278	: TBufCBase16()
sl@0	2279	/**
sl@0	2280	Constructs an empty build independent non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2281
sl@0	2282	It contains no data.
sl@0	2283
sl@0	2284	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which
sl@0	2285	is created as part of the buffer descriptor object.
sl@0	2286
sl@0	2287	Data can, subsequently, be assigned into this buffer descriptor using the
sl@0	2288	assignment operators.
sl@0	2289
sl@0	2290	@see TBufC::operator=
sl@0	2291	*/
sl@0	2292	{}
sl@0	2293
sl@0	2294
sl@0	2295
sl@0	2296
sl@0	2297	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2298	inline TBufC<S>::TBufC(const TText *aString)
sl@0	2299	: TBufCBase16(aString,S)
sl@0	2300	/**
sl@0	2301	Constructs a build independent non-modifiable
sl@0	2302	buffer descriptor from a zero terminated string.
sl@0	2303
sl@0	2304	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which
sl@0	2305	is created as part of this object.
sl@0	2306
sl@0	2307	The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer descriptor's
sl@0	2308	data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the
sl@0	2309	string, excluding the zero terminator.
sl@0	2310
sl@0	2311	@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
sl@0	2312
sl@0	2313	@panic USER 8, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	2314	greater than the value of the integer template parameter for
sl@0	2315	the 16-bit build variant.
sl@0	2316
sl@0	2317	@panic USER 20, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
sl@0	2318	greater than the value of the integer template parameter for
sl@0	2319	the 8-bit build variant.
sl@0	2320	*/
sl@0	2321	{}
sl@0	2322
sl@0	2323
sl@0	2324
sl@0	2325
sl@0	2326	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2327	inline TBufC<S>::TBufC(const TDesC &aDes)
sl@0	2328	: TBufCBase16(aDes,S)
sl@0	2329	/**
sl@0	2330	Constructs a build-independent non-modifiable buffer descriptor from any
sl@0	2331	existing build independent descriptor.
sl@0	2332
sl@0	2333	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which
sl@0	2334	is created as part of this object.
sl@0	2335
sl@0	2336	Data is copied from the source descriptor into this buffer descriptor and
sl@0	2337	the length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the source descriptor.
sl@0	2338
sl@0	2339	The length of the source descriptor must not be greater than the value of
sl@0	2340	the integer template parameter, otherwise the constructor raises a USER 20
sl@0	2341	panic for an 8 bit build variant or a USER 8 panic for a 16 bit (Unicode)
sl@0	2342	build variant.
sl@0	2343
sl@0	2344	@param aDes The source build independent non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	2345
sl@0	2346	@panic USER 8, if the length of the source descriptor is
sl@0	2347	greater than the value of the integer template parameter for
sl@0	2348	the 16-bit build variant.
sl@0	2349
sl@0	2350	@panic USER 20, if the length of the source descriptor is
sl@0	2351	greater than the value of the integer template parameter for
sl@0	2352	the 8-bit build variant.
sl@0	2353	*/
sl@0	2354	{}
sl@0	2355	#else
sl@0	2356	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2357	inline TBufC<S>::TBufC()
sl@0	2358	: TBufCBase8()
sl@0	2359	{}
sl@0	2360	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2361	inline TBufC<S>::TBufC(const TText *aString)
sl@0	2362	: TBufCBase8(aString,S)
sl@0	2363	{}
sl@0	2364	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2365	inline TBufC<S>::TBufC(const TDesC &aDes)
sl@0	2366	: TBufCBase8(aDes,S)
sl@0	2367	{}
sl@0	2368	#endif
sl@0	2369	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2370	inline TBufC<S> &TBufC<S>::operator=(const TText *aString)
sl@0	2371	/**
sl@0	2372	Copies data into this descriptor, replacing any existing data.
sl@0	2373
sl@0	2374	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	2375
sl@0	2376	@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
sl@0	2377
sl@0	2378	@return A reference to this descriptor.
sl@0	2379
sl@0	2380	@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
sl@0	2381	is greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor
sl@0	2382	for the 16-bit build variant.
sl@0	2383
sl@0	2384	@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
sl@0	2385	is greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor
sl@0	2386	for the 8-bit build variant.
sl@0	2387	*/
sl@0	2388	{Copy(aString,S);return(*this);}
sl@0	2389
sl@0	2390
sl@0	2391
sl@0	2392
sl@0	2393	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2394	inline TBufC<S> &TBufC<S>::operator=(const TDesC &aDes)
sl@0	2395	/**
sl@0	2396	Copies data into this descriptor, replacing any existing data.
sl@0	2397
sl@0	2398	The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
sl@0	2399
sl@0	2400	@param aDes A build independent non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	2401
sl@0	2402	@return A reference to this descriptor.
sl@0	2403
sl@0	2404	@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	2405	maximum length of this (target) descriptor for the 16-bit
sl@0	2406	build variant.
sl@0	2407
sl@0	2408	@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
sl@0	2409	maximum length of this (target) descriptor for the 8-bit
sl@0	2410	build variant.
sl@0	2411	*/
sl@0	2412	{Copy(aDes,S);return(*this);}
sl@0	2413
sl@0	2414
sl@0	2415
sl@0	2416
sl@0	2417	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2418	inline TPtr TBufC<S>::Des()
sl@0	2419	/**
sl@0	2420	Creates and returns a build-independent modifiable pointer descriptor for
sl@0	2421	the data represented by this build-independent non-modifiable buffer
sl@0	2422	descriptor.
sl@0	2423
sl@0	2424	The content of a non-modifiable buffer descriptor normally cannot be altered,
sl@0	2425	other than by complete replacement of the data. Creating a modifiable pointer
sl@0	2426	descriptor provides a way of changing the data.
sl@0	2427
sl@0	2428	The modifiable pointer descriptor is set to point to this non-modifiable buffer
sl@0	2429	descriptor's data.
sl@0	2430
sl@0	2431	The length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the length of this
sl@0	2432	non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2433
sl@0	2434	The maximum length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the value
sl@0	2435	of the integer template parameter.
sl@0	2436
sl@0	2437	When data is modified through this new pointer descriptor, the lengths of
sl@0	2438	both it and this constant buffer descriptor are changed.
sl@0	2439
sl@0	2440	@return A build independent modifiable pointer descriptor representing the
sl@0	2441	data in this build independent non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2442	*/
sl@0	2443	{return(DoDes(S));}
sl@0	2444
sl@0	2445
sl@0	2446
sl@0	2447
sl@0	2448	// Template class TBuf
sl@0	2449	#if defined(_UNICODE) && !defined(__KERNEL_MODE__)
sl@0	2450	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2451	inline TBuf<S>::TBuf()
sl@0	2452	: TBufBase16(S)
sl@0	2453	/**
sl@0	2454	Creates a build-independent modifiable buffer descriptor which
sl@0	2455	contains no data.
sl@0	2456
sl@0	2457	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is created
sl@0	2458	as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	2459	*/
sl@0	2460	{}
sl@0	2461
sl@0	2462
sl@0	2463
sl@0	2464
sl@0	2465	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2466	inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(TInt aLength)
sl@0	2467	: TBufBase16(aLength,S)
sl@0	2468	/**
sl@0	2469	Constructs an empty build independent modifiable buffer descriptor and
sl@0	2470	sets its length to the specified value.
sl@0	2471
sl@0	2472	No data is assigned to the descriptor.
sl@0	2473
sl@0	2474	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created
sl@0	2475	as part of the object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	2476
sl@0	2477	@param aLength The length of this modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2478
sl@0	2479	@panic USER 8, if aLength is negative and is greater than the value of the
sl@0	2480	integer template parameter for a 16-bit build variant.
sl@0	2481
sl@0	2482	@panic USER 20, if aLength is negative and is greater than the value of the
sl@0	2483	integer template parameter for a 8-bit build variant.
sl@0	2484	*/
sl@0	2485	{}
sl@0	2486
sl@0	2487
sl@0	2488
sl@0	2489
sl@0	2490	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2491	inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(const TText *aString)
sl@0	2492	: TBufBase16(aString,S)
sl@0	2493	/**
sl@0	2494	Constructs the build-independent modifiable buffer descriptor from
sl@0	2495	a zero terminated string.
sl@0	2496
sl@0	2497	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which
sl@0	2498	is created as part of this object.
sl@0	2499
sl@0	2500	The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer
sl@0	2501	descriptor's data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to
sl@0	2502	the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator.
sl@0	2503
sl@0	2504	@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
sl@0	2505
sl@0	2506	@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
sl@0	2507	is greater than the value of the integer template parameter
sl@0	2508	for a 16-bit build variant.
sl@0	2509	@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
sl@0	2510	is greater than the value of the integer template parameter
sl@0	2511	for a 8-bit build variant.
sl@0	2512	*/
sl@0	2513	{}
sl@0	2514
sl@0	2515
sl@0	2516
sl@0	2517
sl@0	2518	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2519	inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(const TDesC &aDes)
sl@0	2520	: TBufBase16(aDes,S)
sl@0	2521	/**
sl@0	2522	Constructs the build-independent modifiable buffer descriptor from any
sl@0	2523	existing build-independent descriptor.
sl@0	2524
sl@0	2525	The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created
sl@0	2526	as part of this object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
sl@0	2527
sl@0	2528	Data is copied from the source descriptor into this modifiable buffer descriptor
sl@0	2529	and the length of this modifiable buffer descriptor is set to the length of
sl@0	2530	the source descriptor.
sl@0	2531
sl@0	2532	@param aDes The source build independent non-modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	2533
sl@0	2534	@panic USER 11, if the length of the source descriptor is greater than the
sl@0	2535	value of the integer template parameter for a 16-bit
sl@0	2536	build variant.
sl@0	2537	@panic USER 23, if the length of the source descriptor is greater than the
sl@0	2538	value of the integer template parameter for an 8-bit
sl@0	2539	build variant.
sl@0	2540
sl@0	2541	*/
sl@0	2542	{}
sl@0	2543	#else
sl@0	2544	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2545	inline TBuf<S>::TBuf()
sl@0	2546	: TBufBase8(S)
sl@0	2547	{}
sl@0	2548	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2549	inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(TInt aLength)
sl@0	2550	: TBufBase8(aLength,S)
sl@0	2551	{}
sl@0	2552	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2553	inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(const TText *aString)
sl@0	2554	: TBufBase8(aString,S)
sl@0	2555	{}
sl@0	2556	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2557	inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(const TDesC &aDes)
sl@0	2558	: TBufBase8(aDes,S)
sl@0	2559	{}
sl@0	2560	#endif
sl@0	2561	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2562	inline TBuf<S> &TBuf<S>::operator=(const TText *aString)
sl@0	2563	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
sl@0	2564	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2565	inline TBuf<S> &TBuf<S>::operator=(const TDesC &aDes)
sl@0	2566	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
sl@0	2567	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2568	inline TBuf<S> &TBuf<S>::operator=(const TBuf<S> &aBuf)
sl@0	2569	{Copy(aBuf);return(*this);}
sl@0	2570
sl@0	2571
sl@0	2572
sl@0	2573
sl@0	2574	// Template class TLitC
sl@0	2575	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2576	inline const TDesC* TLitC<S>::operator&() const
sl@0	2577	/**
sl@0	2578	Returns a const TDesC type pointer.
sl@0	2579
sl@0	2580	@return A descriptor type pointer to this literal.
sl@0	2581	*/
sl@0	2582	{return REINTERPRET_CAST(const TDesC*,this);}
sl@0	2583
sl@0	2584
sl@0	2585
sl@0	2586
sl@0	2587	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2588	inline const TDesC& TLitC<S>::operator()() const
sl@0	2589	/**
sl@0	2590	Returns a const TDesC type reference.
sl@0	2591
sl@0	2592	@return A descriptor type reference to this literal
sl@0	2593	*/
sl@0	2594	{return *operator&();}
sl@0	2595
sl@0	2596
sl@0	2597
sl@0	2598
sl@0	2599	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2600	inline TLitC<S>::operator const TDesC&() const
sl@0	2601	/**
sl@0	2602	Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC<TInt> type is passed to a function
sl@0	2603	which is prototyped to take a const TDesC& type.
sl@0	2604	*/
sl@0	2605	{return *operator&();}
sl@0	2606
sl@0	2607
sl@0	2608
sl@0	2609
sl@0	2610	template <TInt S>
sl@0	2611	inline TLitC<S>::operator const __TRefDesC() const
sl@0	2612	/**
sl@0	2613	Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC<TInt> type is passed to a function
sl@0	2614	which is prototyped to take a const TRefByValue<const TDesC> type.
sl@0	2615
sl@0	2616	@see __TRefDesC.
sl@0	2617	*/
sl@0	2618	{return *operator&();}
sl@0	2619
sl@0	2620
sl@0	2621
sl@0	2622
sl@0	2623	// Template class TPckgC
sl@0	2624	template <class T>
sl@0	2625	inline TPckgC<T>::TPckgC(const T &aRef)
sl@0	2626	: TPtrC8((const TUint8 *)&aRef,sizeof(T))
sl@0	2627	/**
sl@0	2628	Constructs a packaged non-modifiable pointer descriptor to represent
sl@0	2629	the specified object whose type is defined by the template parameter.
sl@0	2630
sl@0	2631	@param aRef The object to be represented by this packaged non-modifiable
sl@0	2632	pointer descriptor.
sl@0	2633	*/
sl@0	2634	{}
sl@0	2635
sl@0	2636
sl@0	2637
sl@0	2638
sl@0	2639	template <class T>
sl@0	2640	inline const T &TPckgC<T>::operator()() const
sl@0	2641	/**
sl@0	2642	Gets a reference to the object represented by this packaged non-modifiable
sl@0	2643	pointer descriptor.
sl@0	2644
sl@0	2645	@return The packaged object
sl@0	2646	*/
sl@0	2647	{return(((const T )iPtr));}
sl@0	2648
sl@0	2649
sl@0	2650
sl@0	2651
sl@0	2652	// Template class TPckg
sl@0	2653	template <class T>
sl@0	2654	inline TPckg<T>::TPckg(const T &aRef)
sl@0	2655	: TPtr8((TUint8 *)&aRef,sizeof(T),sizeof(T))
sl@0	2656	/**
sl@0	2657	Constructs a packaged modifiable pointer descriptor to represent the specified
sl@0	2658	object whose type is defined by the template parameter.
sl@0	2659
sl@0	2660	@param aRef The object to be represented by this packaged modifiable pointer
sl@0	2661	descriptor.
sl@0	2662	*/
sl@0	2663	{}
sl@0	2664
sl@0	2665
sl@0	2666
sl@0	2667
sl@0	2668	template <class T>
sl@0	2669	inline T &TPckg<T>::operator()()
sl@0	2670	/**
sl@0	2671	Gets a reference to the object represented by this packaged
sl@0	2672	modifiable pointer descriptor.
sl@0	2673
sl@0	2674	@return The packaged object.
sl@0	2675	*/
sl@0	2676	{return(((T )iPtr));}
sl@0	2677
sl@0	2678
sl@0	2679
sl@0	2680
sl@0	2681	// Template class TPckgBuf
sl@0	2682	template <class T>
sl@0	2683	inline TPckgBuf<T>::TPckgBuf()
sl@0	2684	: TAlignedBuf8<sizeof(T)>(sizeof(T))
sl@0	2685	/**
sl@0	2686	Constructs a packaged modifiable buffer descriptor for an object whose type
sl@0	2687	is defined by the template parameter.
sl@0	2688
sl@0	2689	The length of the packaged descriptor is set to the length of the templated
sl@0	2690	class but no data is assigned into the descriptor.
sl@0	2691	*/
sl@0	2692	{new(&this->iBuf[0]) T;}
sl@0	2693
sl@0	2694
sl@0	2695
sl@0	2696
sl@0	2697	template <class T>
sl@0	2698	inline TPckgBuf<T>::TPckgBuf(const T &aRef)
sl@0	2699	: TAlignedBuf8<sizeof(T)>(sizeof(T))
sl@0	2700	/**
sl@0	2701	Constructs a packaged modifiable buffer descriptor for an object whose type
sl@0	2702	is defined by the template parameter and copies the supplied object into the
sl@0	2703	descriptor.
sl@0	2704
sl@0	2705	The length of the packaged descriptor is set to the length of the templated
sl@0	2706	class.
sl@0	2707
sl@0	2708	@param aRef The source object to be copied into the packaged modifiable buffer
sl@0	2709	descriptor.
sl@0	2710	*/
sl@0	2711	{new(&this->iBuf[0]) T(aRef);}
sl@0	2712
sl@0	2713
sl@0	2714
sl@0	2715
sl@0	2716	template <class T>
sl@0	2717	inline TPckgBuf<T> &TPckgBuf<T>::operator=(const TPckgBuf<T> &aRef)
sl@0	2718	/**
sl@0	2719	Copies data from the specified packaged modifiable buffer descriptor into this
sl@0	2720	packaged modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any existing data.
sl@0	2721
sl@0	2722	@param aRef The source packaged modifiable buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2723	@return A reference to this packaged modifiable descriptor.
sl@0	2724	*/
sl@0	2725	{this->Copy(aRef);return(*this);}
sl@0	2726
sl@0	2727
sl@0	2728
sl@0	2729
sl@0	2730	template <class T>
sl@0	2731	inline T &TPckgBuf<T>::operator=(const T &aRef)
sl@0	2732	/**
sl@0	2733	Copies data from the specified object into this packaged modifiable buffer
sl@0	2734	descriptor, replacing any existing data.
sl@0	2735
sl@0	2736	@param aRef The source object.
sl@0	2737	@return A reference to the copy of the source object in the packaged modifiable
sl@0	2738	buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2739	*/
sl@0	2740	{this->Copy((TUint8 )&aRef,sizeof(T));return(((T *)&this->iBuf[0]));}
sl@0	2741
sl@0	2742
sl@0	2743
sl@0	2744
sl@0	2745	template <class T>
sl@0	2746	inline T &TPckgBuf<T>::operator()()
sl@0	2747	/**
sl@0	2748	Gets a reference to the object contained by this packaged modifiable
sl@0	2749	buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2750
sl@0	2751	@return The packaged object.
sl@0	2752	*/
sl@0	2753	{return(((T )&this->iBuf[0]));}
sl@0	2754
sl@0	2755
sl@0	2756
sl@0	2757
sl@0	2758	template <class T>
sl@0	2759	inline const T &TPckgBuf<T>::operator()() const
sl@0	2760	/**
sl@0	2761	Gets a const reference to the object contained by this packaged modifiable
sl@0	2762	buffer descriptor.
sl@0	2763
sl@0	2764	@return The (const) packaged object.
sl@0	2765	*/
sl@0	2766	{return(((T )&this->iBuf[0]));}
sl@0	2767
sl@0	2768
sl@0	2769
sl@0	2770
sl@0	2771	// Class TRequestStatus
sl@0	2772	inline TRequestStatus::TRequestStatus()
sl@0	2773	/**
sl@0	2774	Default constructor.
sl@0	2775	*/
sl@0	2776	: iFlags(0)
sl@0	2777	{}
sl@0	2778
sl@0	2779
sl@0	2780
sl@0	2781
sl@0	2782	inline TRequestStatus::TRequestStatus(TInt aVal)
sl@0	2783	/**
sl@0	2784	Constructs an asynchronous request status object and assigns a completion value
sl@0	2785	to it.
sl@0	2786
sl@0	2787	@param aVal The completion value to be assigned to the constructed request
sl@0	2788	status object.
sl@0	2789	*/
sl@0	2790	: iStatus(aVal),
sl@0	2791	iFlags(aVal==KRequestPending ? TRequestStatus::ERequestPending : 0)
sl@0	2792
sl@0	2793	{}
sl@0	2794
sl@0	2795
sl@0	2796
sl@0	2797
sl@0	2798	inline TInt TRequestStatus::operator=(TInt aVal)
sl@0	2799	/**
sl@0	2800	Assigns the specified completion code to the request status object.
sl@0	2801
sl@0	2802	@param aVal The value to be assigned.
sl@0	2803
sl@0	2804	@return The value assigned.
sl@0	2805	*/
sl@0	2806	{
sl@0	2807	if(aVal==KRequestPending)
sl@0	2808	iFlags\|=TRequestStatus::ERequestPending;
sl@0	2809	else
sl@0	2810	iFlags&=~TRequestStatus::ERequestPending;
sl@0	2811	return (iStatus=aVal);
sl@0	2812	}
sl@0	2813
sl@0	2814
sl@0	2815
sl@0	2816
sl@0	2817	inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator==(TInt aVal) const
sl@0	2818	/**
sl@0	2819	Tests whether the request status object's completion code is the same as
sl@0	2820	the specified value.
sl@0	2821
sl@0	2822	@param aVal The value to be compared.
sl@0	2823
sl@0	2824	@return True, if the values are equal; false otherwise.
sl@0	2825	*/
sl@0	2826	{return(iStatus==aVal);}
sl@0	2827
sl@0	2828
sl@0	2829
sl@0	2830
sl@0	2831	inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator!=(TInt aVal) const
sl@0	2832	/**
sl@0	2833	Tests whether the request status object's completion code is not equal to
sl@0	2834	the specified value.
sl@0	2835
sl@0	2836	@param aVal The value to be compared.
sl@0	2837
sl@0	2838	@return True, if the values are unequal; false otherwise.
sl@0	2839	*/
sl@0	2840	{return(iStatus!=aVal);}
sl@0	2841
sl@0	2842
sl@0	2843
sl@0	2844
sl@0	2845	inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator>=(TInt aVal) const
sl@0	2846	/**
sl@0	2847	Tests whether the request status object's completion code is greater than
sl@0	2848	or equal to the specified value.
sl@0	2849
sl@0	2850	@param aVal The value to be compared.
sl@0	2851
sl@0	2852	@return True, if the request status object's value is greater than or equal
sl@0	2853	to the specified value; false, otherwise.
sl@0	2854	*/
sl@0	2855	{return(iStatus>=aVal);}
sl@0	2856
sl@0	2857
sl@0	2858
sl@0	2859
sl@0	2860	inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator<=(TInt aVal) const
sl@0	2861	/**
sl@0	2862	Tests whether the request status object's completion code is less than or
sl@0	2863	equal to the specified value.
sl@0	2864
sl@0	2865	@param aVal The value to be compared.
sl@0	2866
sl@0	2867	@return True, if the request status object's value is less than or equal
sl@0	2868	to the specified value; false, otherwise.
sl@0	2869	*/
sl@0	2870	{return(iStatus<=aVal);}
sl@0	2871
sl@0	2872
sl@0	2873
sl@0	2874
sl@0	2875	inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator>(TInt aVal) const
sl@0	2876	/**
sl@0	2877	Tests whether the request status object's completion code is greater than
sl@0	2878	the specified value.
sl@0	2879
sl@0	2880	@param aVal The value to be compared.
sl@0	2881
sl@0	2882	@return True, if the request status object's value is greater than
sl@0	2883	the specified value; false, otherwise.
sl@0	2884	*/
sl@0	2885	{return(iStatus>aVal);}
sl@0	2886
sl@0	2887
sl@0	2888
sl@0	2889
sl@0	2890	inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator<(TInt aVal) const
sl@0	2891	/**
sl@0	2892	Tests whether the request status object's completion code is less than the
sl@0	2893	specified value.
sl@0	2894
sl@0	2895	@param aVal The value to be compared.
sl@0	2896
sl@0	2897	@return True, if the request status object's value is less than the specified
sl@0	2898	value; false, otherwise.
sl@0	2899	*/
sl@0	2900	{return(iStatus<aVal);}
sl@0	2901
sl@0	2902
sl@0	2903
sl@0	2904
sl@0	2905	inline TInt TRequestStatus::Int() const
sl@0	2906	/**
sl@0	2907	Gets this request status object's completion code value.
sl@0	2908
sl@0	2909	@return The completion code.
sl@0	2910	*/
sl@0	2911	{return(iStatus);}
sl@0	2912
sl@0	2913
sl@0	2914
sl@0	2915
sl@0	2916	// Class TPoint
sl@0	2917	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	2918	inline TPoint::TPoint()
sl@0	2919	: iX(0),iY(0)
sl@0	2920	/**
sl@0	2921	Constructs default point, initialising its iX and iY members to zero.
sl@0	2922	*/
sl@0	2923	{}
sl@0	2924
sl@0	2925
sl@0	2926
sl@0	2927
sl@0	2928	inline TPoint::TPoint(TInt aX,TInt aY)
sl@0	2929	: iX(aX),iY(aY)
sl@0	2930	/**
sl@0	2931	Constructs a point with the specified x and y co-ordinates.
sl@0	2932
sl@0	2933	@param aX The x co-ordinate value.
sl@0	2934	@param aY The y co-ordinate value.
sl@0	2935	*/
sl@0	2936	{}
sl@0	2937
sl@0	2938
sl@0	2939
sl@0	2940
sl@0	2941	// Class TSize
sl@0	2942	inline TSize::TSize()
sl@0	2943	: iWidth(0),iHeight(0)
sl@0	2944	/**
sl@0	2945	Constructs the size object with its iWidth and iHeight members set to zero.
sl@0	2946	*/
sl@0	2947	{}
sl@0	2948
sl@0	2949
sl@0	2950
sl@0	2951
sl@0	2952	inline TSize::TSize(TInt aWidth,TInt aHeight)
sl@0	2953	: iWidth(aWidth),iHeight(aHeight)
sl@0	2954	/**
sl@0	2955	Constructs the size object with the specified width and height values.
sl@0	2956
sl@0	2957	@param aWidth The width value.
sl@0	2958	@param aHeight The height value .
sl@0	2959	*/
sl@0	2960	{}
sl@0	2961	#endif
sl@0	2962
sl@0	2963
sl@0	2964
sl@0	2965	// Class TPoint3D
sl@0	2966	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	2967	inline TPoint3D::TPoint3D()
sl@0	2968	: iX(0),iY(0),iZ(0)
sl@0	2969	/**
sl@0	2970	Constructs default 3Dpoint, initialising its iX, iY and iZ members to zero.
sl@0	2971	*/
sl@0	2972	{}
sl@0	2973
sl@0	2974	inline TPoint3D::TPoint3D(TInt aX,TInt aY,TInt aZ)
sl@0	2975	: iX(aX),iY(aY),iZ(aZ)
sl@0	2976	/**
sl@0	2977	Constructs TPoint3D with the specified x,y and z co-ordinates.
sl@0	2978
sl@0	2979	@param aX The x co-ordinate value.
sl@0	2980	@param aY The y co-ordinate value.
sl@0	2981	@param aZ The z co-ordinate value.
sl@0	2982	*/
sl@0	2983	{}
sl@0	2984
sl@0	2985
sl@0	2986
sl@0	2987
sl@0	2988	inline TPoint3D::TPoint3D(const TPoint& aPoint)
sl@0	2989	:iX(aPoint.iX),iY(aPoint.iY),iZ(0)
sl@0	2990	/*
sl@0	2991	Copy Construct from TPoint , initialises Z co-ordinate to Zero
sl@0	2992	@param aPoint The TPoint from which we create TPoint3D object
sl@0	2993	*/
sl@0	2994	{}
sl@0	2995
sl@0	2996
sl@0	2997	#endif
sl@0	2998
sl@0	2999
sl@0	3000	// Class TFindHandle
sl@0	3001	inline TFindHandle::TFindHandle()
sl@0	3002	: iHandle(0), iSpare1(0), iObjectIdLow(0), iObjectIdHigh(0)
sl@0	3003	{}
sl@0	3004
sl@0	3005
sl@0	3006
sl@0	3007
sl@0	3008	inline TInt TFindHandle::Handle() const
sl@0	3009	/**
sl@0	3010	@publishedAll
sl@0	3011	@released
sl@0	3012
sl@0	3013	Gets the find-handle number associated with the Kernel object.
sl@0	3014
sl@0	3015	The find-handle number identifies the kernel object with respect to
sl@0	3016	its container.
sl@0	3017
sl@0	3018	Note that setting the find-handle number into a TFindHandle object is not
sl@0	3019	implemented by this class; it is implemented by derived classes, typically by
sl@0	3020	their Next() member functions. The class TFindSemaphore is a good example.
sl@0	3021
sl@0	3022	@return The find-handle number.
sl@0	3023	*/
sl@0	3024	{return iHandle;}
sl@0	3025
sl@0	3026
sl@0	3027
sl@0	3028
sl@0	3029	#ifdef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	3030	const TInt KFindHandleUniqueIdShift=16; ///< @internalComponent
sl@0	3031	const TInt KFindHandleUniqueIdMask=0x7fff; ///< @internalComponent
sl@0	3032	const TInt KFindHandleIndexMask=0x7fff; ///< @internalComponent
sl@0	3033
sl@0	3034
sl@0	3035
sl@0	3036
sl@0	3037	/**
sl@0	3038	Gets the index into its container at which the kernel object was last seen.
sl@0	3039
sl@0	3040	@return The object's index in its container.
sl@0	3041	*/
sl@0	3042	inline TInt TFindHandle::Index() const
sl@0	3043	{return(iHandle&KFindHandleIndexMask);}
sl@0	3044
sl@0	3045
sl@0	3046
sl@0	3047
sl@0	3048	/**
sl@0	3049	Gets the unique ID of the kernel container this object resides in.
sl@0	3050
sl@0	3051	@return The ID of this object's container.
sl@0	3052	*/
sl@0	3053	inline TInt TFindHandle::UniqueID() const
sl@0	3054	{return((iHandle>>KFindHandleUniqueIdShift)&KFindHandleUniqueIdMask);}
sl@0	3055
sl@0	3056
sl@0	3057
sl@0	3058
sl@0	3059	/**
sl@0	3060	Gets the unique ID of the kernel object itself.
sl@0	3061
sl@0	3062	@return The ID of the object.
sl@0	3063	*/
sl@0	3064	inline TUint64 TFindHandle::ObjectID() const
sl@0	3065	{return MAKE_TUINT64(iObjectIdHigh, iObjectIdLow);}
sl@0	3066
sl@0	3067
sl@0	3068
sl@0	3069
sl@0	3070	/**
sl@0	3071	Sets the find handle to refer to a specific object.
sl@0	3072
sl@0	3073	@oaram aIndex The current index of the object in its container.
sl@0	3074	@param aUniqueId The unique ID of the container object.
sl@0	3075	@param aObjectId The unique ID of the object iteself.
sl@0	3076	*/
sl@0	3077	inline void TFindHandle::Set(TInt aIndex, TInt aUniqueId, TUint64 aObjectId)
sl@0	3078	{
sl@0	3079	iHandle=(TInt)((aUniqueId<<KFindHandleUniqueIdShift)\|aIndex);
sl@0	3080	iObjectIdLow=I64LOW(aObjectId);
sl@0	3081	iObjectIdHigh=I64HIGH(aObjectId);
sl@0	3082	}
sl@0	3083
sl@0	3084
sl@0	3085	#else
sl@0	3086
sl@0	3087
sl@0	3088	/**
sl@0	3089	Resets the find handle to its initial state.
sl@0	3090	*/
sl@0	3091	inline void TFindHandle::Reset()
sl@0	3092	{
sl@0	3093	iHandle=iSpare1=iObjectIdLow=iObjectIdHigh=0;
sl@0	3094	}
sl@0	3095	#endif
sl@0	3096
sl@0	3097
sl@0	3098
sl@0	3099
sl@0	3100	// Class RHandleBase
sl@0	3101	inline RHandleBase::RHandleBase()
sl@0	3102	: iHandle(0)
sl@0	3103	/**
sl@0	3104	Default constructor.
sl@0	3105	*/
sl@0	3106	{}
sl@0	3107
sl@0	3108
sl@0	3109
sl@0	3110
sl@0	3111	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	3112	inline RHandleBase::RHandleBase(TInt aHandle)
sl@0	3113	: iHandle(aHandle)
sl@0	3114	/**
sl@0	3115	Copy constructor.
sl@0	3116
sl@0	3117	It constructs this handle from an existing one. Specifically, the handle-number
sl@0	3118	encapsulated by the specified handle is copied to this handle.
sl@0	3119
sl@0	3120	@param aHandle The existing handle to be copied.
sl@0	3121	*/
sl@0	3122	{}
sl@0	3123	#endif
sl@0	3124
sl@0	3125
sl@0	3126
sl@0	3127
sl@0	3128	inline void RHandleBase::SetHandle(TInt aHandle)
sl@0	3129	/**
sl@0	3130	Sets the handle-number of this handle to the specified
sl@0	3131	value.
sl@0	3132
sl@0	3133	@param aHandle The handle-number to be set.
sl@0	3134	*/
sl@0	3135	{ iHandle=aHandle; }
sl@0	3136
sl@0	3137
sl@0	3138
sl@0	3139
sl@0	3140	inline TInt RHandleBase::Handle() const
sl@0	3141	/**
sl@0	3142	Retrieves the handle-number of the object associated with this handle.
sl@0	3143
sl@0	3144	@return The handle number
sl@0	3145	*/
sl@0	3146	{return(iHandle);}
sl@0	3147
sl@0	3148
sl@0	3149
sl@0	3150
sl@0	3151	inline TInt RHandleBase::SetReturnedHandle(TInt aHandleOrError)
sl@0	3152	/**
sl@0	3153	Sets the handle-number of this handle to the specified
sl@0	3154	value.
sl@0	3155
sl@0	3156	The function can take a (zero or positive) handle-number,
sl@0	3157	or a (negative) error number.
sl@0	3158
sl@0	3159	If aHandleOrError represents a handle-number, then the handle-number of this handle
sl@0	3160	is set to that value.
sl@0	3161	If aHandleOrError represents an error number, then the handle-number of this handle is set to zero
sl@0	3162	and the negative value is returned.
sl@0	3163
sl@0	3164	@param aHandleOrError A handle-number, if zero or positive; an error value, if negative.
sl@0	3165
sl@0	3166	@return KErrNone, if aHandle is a handle-number; the value of aHandleOrError, otherwise.
sl@0	3167	*/
sl@0	3168	{
sl@0	3169	#ifndef __SYMC__
sl@0	3170	if(aHandleOrError>=0)
sl@0	3171	{
sl@0	3172	iHandle = aHandleOrError;
sl@0	3173	return KErrNone;
sl@0	3174	}
sl@0	3175	iHandle = 0;
sl@0	3176	return aHandleOrError;
sl@0	3177	#elif defined(_WIN32)
sl@0	3178	//Our problem is that win32 handles can be negative
sl@0	3179	if (aHandleOrError==NULL)
sl@0	3180	{
sl@0	3181	//TODO: check GetLastError and return proper error code
sl@0	3182	return KErrUnknown;
sl@0	3183	}
sl@0	3184	//Valid handle
sl@0	3185	iHandle = aHandleOrError;
sl@0	3186	return KErrNone;
sl@0	3187	#else
sl@0	3188	#error "Platform not supported"
sl@0	3189	#endif
sl@0	3190	}
sl@0	3191
sl@0	3192
sl@0	3193
sl@0	3194
sl@0	3195	// Class RSemaphore
sl@0	3196	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	3197	inline TInt RSemaphore::Open(const TFindSemaphore& aFind,TOwnerType aType)
sl@0	3198	/**
sl@0	3199	Opens a handle to the global semaphore found using a TFindSemaphore object.
sl@0	3200
sl@0	3201	A TFindSemaphore object is used to find all global semaphores whose full names
sl@0	3202	match a specified pattern.
sl@0	3203
sl@0	3204	By default, any thread in the process can use this instance of RSemaphore
sl@0	3205	to access the semaphore. However, specifying EOwnerThread as the second parameter
sl@0	3206	to this function, means that only the opening thread can use this instance
sl@0	3207	of RSemaphore to access the semaphore; any other thread in this process that
sl@0	3208	wants to access the semaphore must either duplicate the handle or use OpenGlobal()
sl@0	3209	again.
sl@0	3210
sl@0	3211	@param aFind A reference to the TFindSemaphore object used to find the semaphore.
sl@0	3212	@param aType An enumeration whose enumerators define the ownership of this
sl@0	3213	semaphore handle. If not explicitly specified, EOwnerProcess is
sl@0	3214	taken as default.
sl@0	3215
sl@0	3216	@return KErrNone if successful otherwise another of the system wide error codes.
sl@0	3217	*/
sl@0	3218	{return(RHandleBase::Open((const TFindHandleBase&)aFind,aType));}
sl@0	3219	#endif
sl@0	3220
sl@0	3221
sl@0	3222
sl@0	3223
sl@0	3224	// Class RFastLock
sl@0	3225
sl@0	3226
sl@0	3227	/**
sl@0	3228	Default constructor.
sl@0	3229	*/
sl@0	3230	inline RFastLock::RFastLock()
sl@0	3231	: iCount(0)
sl@0	3232	{}
sl@0	3233
sl@0	3234
sl@0	3235
sl@0	3236
sl@0	3237	/**
sl@0	3238	Default constructor.
sl@0	3239	*/
sl@0	3240	inline RReadWriteLock::RReadWriteLock()
sl@0	3241	: iValues(0), iPriority(EAlternatePriority), iReaderSem(), iWriterSem()
sl@0	3242	{}
sl@0	3243
sl@0	3244
sl@0	3245
sl@0	3246
sl@0	3247	// Class RMessagePtr2
sl@0	3248
sl@0	3249
sl@0	3250	/**
sl@0	3251	Default constructor
sl@0	3252	*/
sl@0	3253	inline RMessagePtr2::RMessagePtr2()
sl@0	3254	: iHandle(0)
sl@0	3255	{}
sl@0	3256
sl@0	3257
sl@0	3258
sl@0	3259
sl@0	3260	/**
sl@0	3261	Tests whether this message handle is empty.
sl@0	3262
sl@0	3263	@return True, if this message handle is empty, false, otherwise.
sl@0	3264	*/
sl@0	3265	inline TBool RMessagePtr2::IsNull() const
sl@0	3266	{return iHandle==0;}
sl@0	3267
sl@0	3268
sl@0	3269
sl@0	3270
sl@0	3271	/**
sl@0	3272	Gets the message handle value.
sl@0	3273
sl@0	3274	@return The message handle value.
sl@0	3275	*/
sl@0	3276	inline TInt RMessagePtr2::Handle() const
sl@0	3277	{return iHandle;}
sl@0	3278	inline TBool operator==(RMessagePtr2 aLeft,RMessagePtr2 aRight)
sl@0	3279	{return aLeft.Handle()==aRight.Handle();}
sl@0	3280	inline TBool operator!=(RMessagePtr2 aLeft,RMessagePtr2 aRight)
sl@0	3281	{return aLeft.Handle()!=aRight.Handle();}
sl@0	3282
sl@0	3283
sl@0	3284
sl@0	3285
sl@0	3286
sl@0	3287	// Class RMessage
sl@0	3288
sl@0	3289
sl@0	3290	/**
sl@0	3291	Default constructor
sl@0	3292	*/
sl@0	3293	inline RMessage2::RMessage2()
sl@0	3294	:iFunction(0), iSpare1(0), iSessionPtr(NULL), iFlags(0), iSpare3(0)
sl@0	3295	{}
sl@0	3296
sl@0	3297
sl@0	3298
sl@0	3299
sl@0	3300	/**
sl@0	3301	Gets the the number of the function requested by the client.
sl@0	3302
sl@0	3303	@return The function number.
sl@0	3304	*/
sl@0	3305	inline TInt RMessage2::Function() const
sl@0	3306	{return(iFunction);}
sl@0	3307
sl@0	3308
sl@0	3309
sl@0	3310
sl@0	3311	/**
sl@0	3312	Gets the first message argument as an integer value.
sl@0	3313
sl@0	3314	@return The first message argument.
sl@0	3315	*/
sl@0	3316	inline TInt RMessage2::Int0() const
sl@0	3317	{return(iArgs[0]);}
sl@0	3318
sl@0	3319
sl@0	3320
sl@0	3321
sl@0	3322	/**
sl@0	3323	Gets the second message argument as an integer value.
sl@0	3324
sl@0	3325	@return The second message argument.
sl@0	3326	*/
sl@0	3327	inline TInt RMessage2::Int1() const
sl@0	3328	{return(iArgs[1]);}
sl@0	3329
sl@0	3330
sl@0	3331
sl@0	3332
sl@0	3333	/**
sl@0	3334	Gets the third message argument as an integer value.
sl@0	3335
sl@0	3336	@return The third message argument.
sl@0	3337	*/
sl@0	3338	inline TInt RMessage2::Int2() const
sl@0	3339	{return(iArgs[2]);}
sl@0	3340
sl@0	3341
sl@0	3342
sl@0	3343	/**
sl@0	3344	Gets the fourth message argument as an integer value.
sl@0	3345
sl@0	3346	@return The fourth message argument.
sl@0	3347	*/
sl@0	3348	inline TInt RMessage2::Int3() const
sl@0	3349	{return(iArgs[3]);}
sl@0	3350
sl@0	3351
sl@0	3352
sl@0	3353	/**
sl@0	3354	Gets the first message argument as a pointer type.
sl@0	3355
sl@0	3356	@return The first message argument.
sl@0	3357	*/
sl@0	3358	inline const TAny *RMessage2::Ptr0() const
sl@0	3359	{return((const TAny *)iArgs[0]);}
sl@0	3360
sl@0	3361
sl@0	3362
sl@0	3363
sl@0	3364	/**
sl@0	3365	Gets the second message argument as a pointer type.
sl@0	3366
sl@0	3367	@return The second message argument.
sl@0	3368	*/
sl@0	3369	inline const TAny *RMessage2::Ptr1() const
sl@0	3370	{return((const TAny *)iArgs[1]);}
sl@0	3371
sl@0	3372
sl@0	3373
sl@0	3374
sl@0	3375	/**
sl@0	3376	Gets the third message argument as a pointer type.
sl@0	3377
sl@0	3378	@return The third message argument.
sl@0	3379	*/
sl@0	3380	inline const TAny *RMessage2::Ptr2() const
sl@0	3381	{return((const TAny *)iArgs[2]);}
sl@0	3382
sl@0	3383
sl@0	3384
sl@0	3385
sl@0	3386	/**
sl@0	3387	Gets the fourth message argument as a pointer type.
sl@0	3388
sl@0	3389	@return The fourth message argument.
sl@0	3390	*/
sl@0	3391	inline const TAny *RMessage2::Ptr3() const
sl@0	3392	{return((const TAny *)iArgs[3]);}
sl@0	3393
sl@0	3394
sl@0	3395
sl@0	3396	/**
sl@0	3397	Gets a pointer to the session.
sl@0	3398
sl@0	3399	@return A pointer to the session object.
sl@0	3400	*/
sl@0	3401	inline CSession2* RMessage2::Session() const
sl@0	3402	{return (CSession2*)iSessionPtr; }
sl@0	3403
sl@0	3404
sl@0	3405
sl@0	3406
sl@0	3407	// Class TUid
sl@0	3408	inline TUid TUid::Uid(TInt aUid)
sl@0	3409	/**
sl@0	3410	Constructs the TUid object from a 32-bit integer.
sl@0	3411
sl@0	3412	@param aUid The 32-bit integer value from which the TUid object is to be
sl@0	3413	constructed.
sl@0	3414
sl@0	3415	@return The constructed TUid object.
sl@0	3416	*/
sl@0	3417	{TUid uid={aUid};return uid;}
sl@0	3418
sl@0	3419
sl@0	3420
sl@0	3421
sl@0	3422	inline TUid TUid::Null()
sl@0	3423	/**
sl@0	3424	Constructs a Null-valued TUid object.
sl@0	3425
sl@0	3426	@return The constructed Null-valued TUid object.
sl@0	3427	*/
sl@0	3428	{TUid uid={KNullUidValue};return uid;}
sl@0	3429
sl@0	3430
sl@0	3431
sl@0	3432
sl@0	3433	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	3434	// Template class TArray
sl@0	3435	template <class T>
sl@0	3436	inline TArray<T>::TArray(TInt (aCount)(const CBase aPtr),const TAny (anAt)(const CBase aPtr,TInt anIndex),const CBase aPtr)
sl@0	3437	: iPtr(aPtr),iCount(aCount),iAt(anAt)
sl@0	3438	/**
sl@0	3439	Constructor.
sl@0	3440
sl@0	3441	A TArray object is not intended to be instantiated explicitly. An object of
sl@0	3442	this type is instantiated as a result of a call to to the Array() member
sl@0	3443	function of a concrete array class
sl@0	3444
sl@0	3445	@param aCount A pointer to a function which takes a
sl@0	3446	@code
sl@0	3447	const CBase*
sl@0	3448	@endcode
sl@0	3449	argument and returns a
sl@0	3450	@code
sl@0	3451	TInt
sl@0	3452	@endcode
sl@0	3453	aCount must point to the member function which returns the
sl@0	3454	current number of elements of type class T contained in the
sl@0	3455	array at aPtr, for which this TArray is being constructed.
sl@0	3456	This argument is supplied by the Array() member function of the
sl@0	3457	array class.
sl@0	3458	@param anAt A pointer to a function which takes a
sl@0	3459	@code
sl@0	3460	const CBase*
sl@0	3461	@endcode
sl@0	3462	and a
sl@0	3463	@code
sl@0	3464	TInt
sl@0	3465	@endcode
sl@0	3466	argument, and returns a pointer to
sl@0	3467	@code
sl@0	3468	TAny
sl@0	3469	@endcode
sl@0	3470	anAt must point to the member function which returns a reference
sl@0	3471	to the element located at position anIndex within the array at
sl@0	3472	aPtr, for which this TArray is being constructed.
sl@0	3473	This argument is supplied by the Array() member function of the
sl@0	3474	array class.
sl@0	3475	@param aPtr A pointer to the array for which this TArray is being
sl@0	3476	constructed. This argument is supplied by the Array() member
sl@0	3477	function of the array class.
sl@0	3478
sl@0	3479	@see CArrayFixFlat::Array
sl@0	3480	@see CArrayFixSeg::Array
sl@0	3481	@see CArrayVarFlat::Array
sl@0	3482	@see CArrayVarSeg::Array
sl@0	3483	@see CArrayPakFlat::Array
sl@0	3484	@see RArray::Array
sl@0	3485	@see RPointerArray::Array
sl@0	3486	@see RArray<TInt>::Array
sl@0	3487	@see RArray<TUint>::Array
sl@0	3488	*/
sl@0	3489	{}
sl@0	3490
sl@0	3491
sl@0	3492
sl@0	3493
sl@0	3494	template <class T>
sl@0	3495	inline TInt TArray<T>::Count() const
sl@0	3496	/**
sl@0	3497	Gets the number of elements currently held in the array for which this generic
sl@0	3498	array has been constructed.
sl@0	3499
sl@0	3500	@return The number of array elements.
sl@0	3501	*/
sl@0	3502	{return((*iCount)(iPtr));}
sl@0	3503
sl@0	3504
sl@0	3505
sl@0	3506
sl@0	3507	template <class T>
sl@0	3508	inline const T &TArray<T>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
sl@0	3509	/**
sl@0	3510	Gets a reference to the element located at the specified position.
sl@0	3511
sl@0	3512	The returned reference is const and cannot be used to change the element.
sl@0	3513	Any member function of the referenced template class T must be declared
sl@0	3514	as const if that function is to be accessed through this operator.
sl@0	3515
sl@0	3516	@param anIndex The position of the element within the array for which this
sl@0	3517	TArray has been constructed. The position is relative to zero;
sl@0	3518	i.e. zero implies the first element in the array.
sl@0	3519
sl@0	3520	@return A const reference to the element located at position anIndex within
sl@0	3521	the array for which this TArray has been constructed.
sl@0	3522
sl@0	3523	@panic E32USER-CBase 21, if anIndex is negative, or greater than or equal to
sl@0	3524	the number of objects currently within the array.
sl@0	3525	*/
sl@0	3526	{return(((const T )(*iAt)(iPtr,anIndex)));}
sl@0	3527	#endif
sl@0	3528
sl@0	3529
sl@0	3530
sl@0	3531
sl@0	3532	// Class TIdentityRelation<T>
sl@0	3533	template <class T>
sl@0	3534	inline TIdentityRelation<T>::TIdentityRelation()
sl@0	3535	/**
sl@0	3536	Constructs the object to use the equality operator (==) defined for class T
sl@0	3537	to determine whether two class T type objects match.
sl@0	3538	*/
sl@0	3539	{iIdentity=(TGeneralIdentityRelation)&EqualityOperatorCompare;}
sl@0	3540
sl@0	3541
sl@0	3542
sl@0	3543
sl@0	3544	template <class T>
sl@0	3545	inline TIdentityRelation<T>::TIdentityRelation( TBool (*anIdentity)(const T&, const T&) )
sl@0	3546	/**
sl@0	3547	Constructs the object taking the specified function as an argument.
sl@0	3548
sl@0	3549	The specified function should implement an algorithm for determining whether
sl@0	3550	two class T type objects match. It should return:
sl@0	3551
sl@0	3552	1. true, if the two objects match.
sl@0	3553
sl@0	3554	2. false, if the two objects do not match.
sl@0	3555
sl@0	3556	@param anIdentity A pointer to a function that takes constant references to two
sl@0	3557	class T objects and returns a TInt value.
sl@0	3558	*/
sl@0	3559	{ iIdentity=(TGeneralIdentityRelation)anIdentity; }
sl@0	3560
sl@0	3561
sl@0	3562
sl@0	3563
sl@0	3564	template <class T>
sl@0	3565	inline TIdentityRelation<T>::operator TGeneralIdentityRelation() const
sl@0	3566	/**
sl@0	3567	Operator that gets the function that determines whether two
sl@0	3568	objects of a given class type match.
sl@0	3569	*/
sl@0	3570	{ return iIdentity; }
sl@0	3571
sl@0	3572
sl@0	3573
sl@0	3574	template <class T>
sl@0	3575	inline TBool TIdentityRelation<T>::EqualityOperatorCompare(const T& aLeft, const T& aRight)
sl@0	3576	/**
sl@0	3577	Compares two objects of class T using the equality operator defined for class T.
sl@0	3578	*/
sl@0	3579	{return aLeft == aRight;}
sl@0	3580
sl@0	3581
sl@0	3582
sl@0	3583	// Class TLinearOrder<T>
sl@0	3584	template <class T>
sl@0	3585	inline TLinearOrder<T>::TLinearOrder( TInt(*anOrder)(const T&, const T&) )
sl@0	3586	/**
sl@0	3587	Constructs the object taking the specified function as an argument.
sl@0	3588
sl@0	3589	The specified function should implement an algorithm that determines the
sl@0	3590	order of two class T type objects. It should return:
sl@0	3591
sl@0	3592	1. zero, if the two objects are equal.
sl@0	3593
sl@0	3594	2. a negative value, if the first object is less than the second.
sl@0	3595
sl@0	3596	3. a positive value, if the first object is greater than the second.
sl@0	3597
sl@0	3598	@param anOrder A pointer to a function that takes constant references to two
sl@0	3599	class T objects and returns a TInt value.
sl@0	3600	*/
sl@0	3601	{ iOrder=(TGeneralLinearOrder)anOrder; }
sl@0	3602
sl@0	3603
sl@0	3604
sl@0	3605
sl@0	3606	template <class T>
sl@0	3607	inline TLinearOrder<T>::operator TGeneralLinearOrder() const
sl@0	3608	/**
sl@0	3609	Operator that gets the function that determines the order of two
sl@0	3610	objects of a given class type.
sl@0	3611	*/
sl@0	3612	{ return iOrder; }
sl@0	3613
sl@0	3614
sl@0	3615
sl@0	3616
sl@0	3617	// Class RPointerArray<T>
sl@0	3618
sl@0	3619	/**
sl@0	3620	Default C++ constructor.
sl@0	3621
sl@0	3622	This constructs an array object for an array of pointers with default
sl@0	3623	granularity, which is 8.
sl@0	3624	*/
sl@0	3625	template <class T>
sl@0	3626	inline RPointerArray<T>::RPointerArray()
sl@0	3627	: RPointerArrayBase()
sl@0	3628	{}
sl@0	3629
sl@0	3630
sl@0	3631
sl@0	3632
sl@0	3633	/**
sl@0	3634	C++ constructor with granularity.
sl@0	3635
sl@0	3636	This constructs an array object for an array of pointers with the specified
sl@0	3637	granularity.
sl@0	3638
sl@0	3639	@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
sl@0	3640
sl@0	3641	@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive, or greater than or equal
sl@0	3642	to 0x10000000.
sl@0	3643	*/
sl@0	3644	template <class T>
sl@0	3645	inline RPointerArray<T>::RPointerArray(TInt aGranularity)
sl@0	3646	: RPointerArrayBase(aGranularity)
sl@0	3647	{}
sl@0	3648
sl@0	3649
sl@0	3650
sl@0	3651
sl@0	3652	/**
sl@0	3653	C++ constructor with minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
sl@0	3654
sl@0	3655	This constructs an array object for an array of pointers with the specified
sl@0	3656	minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
sl@0	3657
sl@0	3658	@param aMinGrowBy The minimum growth step of the array. Must be between 1 and
sl@0	3659	65535 inclusive.
sl@0	3660	@param aFactor The factor by which the array grows, multiplied by 256.
sl@0	3661	For example 512 specifies a factor of 2. Must be between 257
sl@0	3662	and 32767 inclusive.
sl@0	3663
sl@0	3664	@panic USER 192, if aMinGrowBy<=0 or aMinGrowBy>65535.
sl@0	3665	@panic USER 193, if aFactor<=257 or aFactor>32767.
sl@0	3666	*/
sl@0	3667	template <class T>
sl@0	3668	inline RPointerArray<T>::RPointerArray(TInt aMinGrowBy, TInt aFactor)
sl@0	3669	: RPointerArrayBase(aMinGrowBy, aFactor)
sl@0	3670	{}
sl@0	3671
sl@0	3672
sl@0	3673
sl@0	3674
sl@0	3675	template <class T>
sl@0	3676	inline void RPointerArray<T>::Close()
sl@0	3677	/**
sl@0	3678	Closes the array and frees all memory allocated to it.
sl@0	3679
sl@0	3680	The function must be called before this array object goes out of scope.
sl@0	3681
sl@0	3682	Note that the function does not delete the objects whose pointers are contained
sl@0	3683	in the array.
sl@0	3684	*/
sl@0	3685	{RPointerArrayBase::Close();}
sl@0	3686
sl@0	3687
sl@0	3688
sl@0	3689
sl@0	3690	template <class T>
sl@0	3691	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Count() const
sl@0	3692	/**
sl@0	3693	Gets the number of object pointers in the array.
sl@0	3694
sl@0	3695	@return The number of object pointers in the array.
sl@0	3696	*/
sl@0	3697	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Count(); }
sl@0	3698
sl@0	3699
sl@0	3700
sl@0	3701
sl@0	3702	template <class T>
sl@0	3703	inline T* const& RPointerArray<T>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
sl@0	3704	/**
sl@0	3705	Gets a reference to the object pointer located at the specified
sl@0	3706	position within the array.
sl@0	3707
sl@0	3708	The compiler chooses this option if the returned reference is used in
sl@0	3709	an expression where the reference cannot be modified.
sl@0	3710
sl@0	3711	@param anIndex The position of the object pointer within the array. The
sl@0	3712	position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object
sl@0	3713	pointer at the beginning of the array.
sl@0	3714
sl@0	3715	@return A const reference to the object pointer at position anIndex within
sl@0	3716	the array.
sl@0	3717
sl@0	3718	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	3719	objects currently in the array.
sl@0	3720	*/
sl@0	3721	{return (T* const&)At(anIndex);}
sl@0	3722
sl@0	3723
sl@0	3724
sl@0	3725
sl@0	3726	template <class T>
sl@0	3727	inline T*& RPointerArray<T>::operator[](TInt anIndex)
sl@0	3728	/**
sl@0	3729	Gets a reference to the object pointer located at the specified
sl@0	3730	position within the array.
sl@0	3731
sl@0	3732	The compiler chooses this option if the returned reference is used in
sl@0	3733	an expression where the reference can be modified.
sl@0	3734
sl@0	3735	@param anIndex The position of the object pointer within the array. The
sl@0	3736	position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object
sl@0	3737	pointer at the beginning of the array.
sl@0	3738
sl@0	3739	@return A non-const reference to the object pointer at position anIndex within
sl@0	3740	the array.
sl@0	3741
sl@0	3742	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	3743	objects currently in the array.
sl@0	3744	*/
sl@0	3745	{return (T*&)At(anIndex);}
sl@0	3746
sl@0	3747
sl@0	3748
sl@0	3749
sl@0	3750	template <class T>
sl@0	3751	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Append(const T* anEntry)
sl@0	3752	/**
sl@0	3753	Appends an object pointer onto the array.
sl@0	3754
sl@0	3755	@param anEntry The object pointer to be appended.
sl@0	3756
sl@0	3757	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	3758	wide error codes.
sl@0	3759	*/
sl@0	3760	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Append(anEntry); }
sl@0	3761
sl@0	3762
sl@0	3763
sl@0	3764
sl@0	3765	template <class T>
sl@0	3766	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Insert(const T* anEntry, TInt aPos)
sl@0	3767	/**
sl@0	3768	Inserts an object pointer into the array at the specified position.
sl@0	3769
sl@0	3770	@param anEntry The object pointer to be inserted.
sl@0	3771	@param aPos The position within the array where the object pointer is to be
sl@0	3772	inserted. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies
sl@0	3773	that a pointer is inserted at the beginning of the array.
sl@0	3774
sl@0	3775	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	3776	wide error codes.
sl@0	3777
sl@0	3778	@panic USER 131, if aPos is negative, or is greater than the number of object
sl@0	3779	pointers currently in the array.
sl@0	3780	*/
sl@0	3781	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Insert(anEntry,aPos); }
sl@0	3782
sl@0	3783
sl@0	3784
sl@0	3785
sl@0	3786	template <class T>
sl@0	3787	inline void RPointerArray<T>::Remove(TInt anIndex)
sl@0	3788	/**
sl@0	3789	Removes the object pointer at the specified position from the array.
sl@0	3790
sl@0	3791	Note that the function does not delete the object whose pointer is removed.
sl@0	3792
sl@0	3793	@param anIndex The position within the array from where the object pointer
sl@0	3794	is to be removed. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
sl@0	3795	implies that a pointer at the beginning of the array is to be
sl@0	3796	removed.
sl@0	3797
sl@0	3798	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	3799	objects currently in the array.
sl@0	3800	*/
sl@0	3801	{RPointerArrayBase::Remove(anIndex);}
sl@0	3802
sl@0	3803
sl@0	3804
sl@0	3805
sl@0	3806	template <class T>
sl@0	3807	inline void RPointerArray<T>::Compress()
sl@0	3808	/**
sl@0	3809	Compresses the array down to a minimum.
sl@0	3810
sl@0	3811	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is just
sl@0	3812	sufficient for its contained object pointers.
sl@0	3813	Subsequently adding a new object pointer to the array
sl@0	3814	always results in a re-allocation of memory.
sl@0	3815	*/
sl@0	3816	{RPointerArrayBase::Compress();}
sl@0	3817
sl@0	3818
sl@0	3819
sl@0	3820
sl@0	3821	template <class T>
sl@0	3822	inline void RPointerArray<T>::Reset()
sl@0	3823	/**
sl@0	3824	Empties the array.
sl@0	3825
sl@0	3826	It frees all memory allocated to the array and resets the internal state so
sl@0	3827	that it is ready to be reused.
sl@0	3828
sl@0	3829	This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to this
sl@0	3830	function.
sl@0	3831
sl@0	3832	Note that the function does not delete the objects whose pointers are contained
sl@0	3833	in the array.
sl@0	3834	*/
sl@0	3835	{RPointerArrayBase::Reset();}
sl@0	3836
sl@0	3837
sl@0	3838
sl@0	3839
sl@0	3840	template <class T>
sl@0	3841	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Find(const T* anEntry) const
sl@0	3842	/**
sl@0	3843	Finds the first object pointer in the array which matches the specified object
sl@0	3844	pointer, using a sequential search.
sl@0	3845
sl@0	3846	Matching is based on the comparison of pointers.
sl@0	3847
sl@0	3848	The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There
sl@0	3849	is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
sl@0	3850
sl@0	3851	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	3852	@return The index of the first matching object pointer within the array.
sl@0	3853	KErrNotFound, if no matching object pointer can be found.
sl@0	3854	*/
sl@0	3855	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Find(anEntry); }
sl@0	3856
sl@0	3857
sl@0	3858
sl@0	3859
sl@0	3860	template <class T>
sl@0	3861	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Find(const T* anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) const
sl@0	3862	/**
sl@0	3863	Finds the first object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified
sl@0	3864	object, using a sequential search and a matching algorithm.
sl@0	3865
sl@0	3866	The algorithm for determining whether two class T objects match is provided
sl@0	3867	by a function supplied by the caller.
sl@0	3868
sl@0	3869	The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There
sl@0	3870	is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
sl@0	3871
sl@0	3872	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	3873	@param anIdentity A package encapsulating the function which determines whether
sl@0	3874	two class T objects match.
sl@0	3875
sl@0	3876	@return The index of the first matching object pointer within the array.
sl@0	3877	KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	3878	*/
sl@0	3879	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Find(anEntry,anIdentity); }
sl@0	3880
sl@0	3881
sl@0	3882
sl@0	3883
sl@0	3884	template <class T>
sl@0	3885	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindReverse(const T* anEntry) const
sl@0	3886	/**
sl@0	3887	Finds the last object pointer in the array which matches the specified object
sl@0	3888	pointer, using a sequential search.
sl@0	3889
sl@0	3890	Matching is based on the comparison of pointers.
sl@0	3891
sl@0	3892	The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There
sl@0	3893	is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
sl@0	3894
sl@0	3895	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	3896	@return The index of the last matching object pointer within the array.
sl@0	3897	KErrNotFound, if no matching object pointer can be found.
sl@0	3898	*/
sl@0	3899	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindReverse(anEntry); }
sl@0	3900
sl@0	3901
sl@0	3902
sl@0	3903
sl@0	3904	template <class T>
sl@0	3905	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindReverse(const T* anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) const
sl@0	3906	/**
sl@0	3907	Finds the last object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified
sl@0	3908	object, using a sequential search and a matching algorithm.
sl@0	3909
sl@0	3910	The algorithm for determining whether two class T objects match is provided
sl@0	3911	by a function supplied by the caller.
sl@0	3912
sl@0	3913	The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There
sl@0	3914	is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
sl@0	3915
sl@0	3916	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	3917	@param anIdentity A package encapsulating the function which determines whether
sl@0	3918	two class T objects match.
sl@0	3919
sl@0	3920	@return The index of the last matching object pointer within the array.
sl@0	3921	KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	3922	*/
sl@0	3923	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindReverse(anEntry,anIdentity); }
sl@0	3924
sl@0	3925
sl@0	3926
sl@0	3927
sl@0	3928	template <class T>
sl@0	3929	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindInAddressOrder(const T* anEntry) const
sl@0	3930	/**
sl@0	3931	Finds the object pointer in the array that matches the specified object
sl@0	3932	pointer, using a binary search technique.
sl@0	3933
sl@0	3934	The function assumes that object pointers in the array are in address order.
sl@0	3935
sl@0	3936	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	3937
sl@0	3938	@return The index of the matching object pointer within the array or KErrNotFound
sl@0	3939	if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	3940	*/
sl@0	3941	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry); }
sl@0	3942
sl@0	3943
sl@0	3944
sl@0	3945
sl@0	3946	template <class T>
sl@0	3947	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindInOrder(const T* anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder) const
sl@0	3948	/**
sl@0	3949	Finds the object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified
sl@0	3950	object, using a binary search technique and an ordering algorithm.
sl@0	3951
sl@0	3952	The function assumes that existing object pointers in the array are ordered
sl@0	3953	so that the objects themselves are in object order as determined by an algorithm
sl@0	3954	supplied by the caller and packaged as a TLinearOrder<T>.
sl@0	3955
sl@0	3956	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	3957	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	3958	of two class T objects.
sl@0	3959
sl@0	3960	@return The index of the matching object pointer within the array or KErrNotFound,
sl@0	3961	if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	3962	*/
sl@0	3963	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsq(anEntry,anOrder); }
sl@0	3964
sl@0	3965
sl@0	3966
sl@0	3967
sl@0	3968	template <class T>
sl@0	3969	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindInAddressOrder(const T* anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
sl@0	3970	/**
sl@0	3971	Finds the object pointer in the array that matches the specified object
sl@0	3972	pointer, using a binary search technique.
sl@0	3973
sl@0	3974	The function assumes that object pointers in the array are in address order.
sl@0	3975
sl@0	3976	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	3977	@param anIndex A TInt supplied by the caller. On return, contains an index
sl@0	3978	value:
sl@0	3979	If the function returns KErrNone, this is the index of the
sl@0	3980	matching object pointer within the array.
sl@0	3981	If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the
sl@0	3982	index of the first object pointer within the array which
sl@0	3983	logically follows after anEntry.
sl@0	3984
sl@0	3985	@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found.
sl@0	3986	KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	3987	*/
sl@0	3988	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,anIndex); }
sl@0	3989
sl@0	3990
sl@0	3991
sl@0	3992
sl@0	3993	template <class T>
sl@0	3994	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindInOrder(const T* anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder) const
sl@0	3995	/**
sl@0	3996	Finds the object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified
sl@0	3997	object, using a binary search technique and an ordering algorithm.
sl@0	3998
sl@0	3999	The function assumes that existing object pointers in the array are ordered
sl@0	4000	so that the objects themselves are in object order as determined by an
sl@0	4001	algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as a TLinearOrder<T>.
sl@0	4002
sl@0	4003	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	4004	@param anIndex A TInt supplied by the caller. On return, contains an
sl@0	4005	index value:
sl@0	4006	If the function returns KErrNone, this is the index of the
sl@0	4007	matching object pointer within the array.
sl@0	4008	If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of
sl@0	4009	the first object pointer in the array whose object is larger
sl@0	4010	than the entry being searched for - if no objects pointed to in
sl@0	4011	the array are larger, then the index value is the same as the
sl@0	4012	total number of object pointers in the array.
sl@0	4013
sl@0	4014	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	4015	of two class T objects.
sl@0	4016
sl@0	4017	@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found.
sl@0	4018	KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	4019	*/
sl@0	4020	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearch(anEntry,anIndex,anOrder); }
sl@0	4021
sl@0	4022
sl@0	4023
sl@0	4024
sl@0	4025	template <class T>
sl@0	4026	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::SpecificFindInAddressOrder(const T* anEntry, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	4027	/**
sl@0	4028	Finds the object pointer in the array that matches the specified object
sl@0	4029	pointer, using a binary search technique.
sl@0	4030
sl@0	4031	Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last
sl@0	4032	or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	4033
sl@0	4034	The function assumes that object pointers in the array are in address order.
sl@0	4035
sl@0	4036	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	4037	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or
sl@0	4038	any match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	4039
sl@0	4040	@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
sl@0	4041	index of a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the
sl@0	4042	value of aMode:
sl@0	4043	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	4044	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	4045	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	4046	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
sl@0	4047	the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	4048
sl@0	4049	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	4050	*/
sl@0	4051	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry, aMode); }
sl@0	4052
sl@0	4053
sl@0	4054
sl@0	4055
sl@0	4056	template <class T>
sl@0	4057	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::SpecificFindInOrder(const T* anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	4058	/**
sl@0	4059	Finds the object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified
sl@0	4060	object, using a binary search technique and an ordering algorithm.
sl@0	4061
sl@0	4062	Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last
sl@0	4063	or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	4064
sl@0	4065	The function assumes that existing object pointers in the array are ordered
sl@0	4066	so that the objects themselves are in object order as determined by an algorithm
sl@0	4067	supplied by the caller and packaged as a TLinearOrder<T> type.
sl@0	4068
sl@0	4069	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	4070	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	4071	of two class T objects.
sl@0	4072	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match,
sl@0	4073	as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	4074
sl@0	4075	@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
sl@0	4076	index of a matching element - what the index refers to depends on
sl@0	4077	the value of aMode:
sl@0	4078	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	4079	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	4080	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	4081	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
sl@0	4082	then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	4083
sl@0	4084	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	4085	*/
sl@0	4086	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsq(anEntry,anOrder,aMode); }
sl@0	4087
sl@0	4088
sl@0	4089
sl@0	4090
sl@0	4091	template <class T>
sl@0	4092	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::SpecificFindInAddressOrder(const T* anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	4093	/**
sl@0	4094	Finds the object pointer in the array that matches the specified object
sl@0	4095	pointer, using a binary search technique.
sl@0	4096
sl@0	4097	Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last
sl@0	4098	or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	4099
sl@0	4100	The function assumes that object pointers in the array are in address order.
sl@0	4101
sl@0	4102	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	4103	@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an
sl@0	4104	index value depending on whether a match is found and on the
sl@0	4105	value of aMode.
sl@0	4106	If there is no matching element in the array, then this is
sl@0	4107	the index of the first element in the array that is bigger than
sl@0	4108	the element being searched for - if no elements in the array are
sl@0	4109	bigger, then the index value is the same as the total number of
sl@0	4110	elements in the array. If there is a matching element, then what
sl@0	4111	the index refers to depends on the value of aMode:
sl@0	4112	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	4113	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	4114	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows the
sl@0	4115	last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
sl@0	4116	then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	4117
sl@0	4118	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any
sl@0	4119	match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	4120
sl@0	4121	@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found.
sl@0	4122	KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	4123
sl@0	4124	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	4125	*/
sl@0	4126	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,anIndex,aMode); }
sl@0	4127
sl@0	4128
sl@0	4129
sl@0	4130
sl@0	4131	template <class T>
sl@0	4132	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::SpecificFindInOrder(const T* anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	4133	/**
sl@0	4134	Finds the object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified
sl@0	4135	object, using a binary search technique and an ordering algorithm.
sl@0	4136
sl@0	4137	Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last or any
sl@0	4138	matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	4139
sl@0	4140	The function assumes that existing object pointers in the array are ordered
sl@0	4141	so that the objects themselves are in object order as determined by an
sl@0	4142	algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as a TLinearOrder<T> type.
sl@0	4143
sl@0	4144	@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
sl@0	4145	@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an
sl@0	4146	index value depending on whether a match is found and on the
sl@0	4147	value of aMode. If there is no matching element in the array,
sl@0	4148	then this is the index of the first element in the array
sl@0	4149	that is bigger than the element being searched for - if
sl@0	4150	no elements in the array are bigger, then the index value
sl@0	4151	is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	4152	If there is a matching element, then what the index refers to
sl@0	4153	depends on the value of aMode:
sl@0	4154	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	4155	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	4156	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	4157	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element
sl@0	4158	of the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	4159
sl@0	4160	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	4161	of two class T objects.
sl@0	4162	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or
sl@0	4163	any match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	4164
sl@0	4165	@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found.
sl@0	4166	KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	4167
sl@0	4168	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	4169	*/
sl@0	4170	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearch(anEntry,anIndex,anOrder,aMode); }
sl@0	4171
sl@0	4172
sl@0	4173
sl@0	4174
sl@0	4175	template <class T>
sl@0	4176	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::InsertInAddressOrder(const T* anEntry)
sl@0	4177	/**
sl@0	4178	Inserts an object pointer into the array in address order.
sl@0	4179
sl@0	4180	No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
sl@0	4181	an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
sl@0	4182
sl@0	4183	The function assumes that existing object pointers within the array are in
sl@0	4184	address order.
sl@0	4185
sl@0	4186	@param anEntry The object pointer to be inserted.
sl@0	4187
sl@0	4188	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
sl@0	4189	KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
sl@0	4190	to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
sl@0	4191	error codes.
sl@0	4192	*/
sl@0	4193	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,EFalse); }
sl@0	4194
sl@0	4195
sl@0	4196
sl@0	4197
sl@0	4198	template <class T>
sl@0	4199	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::InsertInOrder(const T* anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
sl@0	4200	/**
sl@0	4201	Inserts an object pointer into the array so that the object itself is in object
sl@0	4202	order.
sl@0	4203
sl@0	4204	The algorithm for determining the order of two class T objects is provided
sl@0	4205	by a function supplied by the caller.
sl@0	4206
sl@0	4207	No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
sl@0	4208	an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
sl@0	4209
sl@0	4210	The function assumes that the array is ordered so that the referenced objects
sl@0	4211	are in object order.
sl@0	4212
sl@0	4213	@param anEntry The object pointer to be inserted.
sl@0	4214	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	4215	of two class T objects.
sl@0	4216
sl@0	4217	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
sl@0	4218	KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
sl@0	4219	to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
sl@0	4220	error codes.
sl@0	4221	*/
sl@0	4222	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsq(anEntry,anOrder,EFalse); }
sl@0	4223
sl@0	4224
sl@0	4225
sl@0	4226
sl@0	4227	template <class T>
sl@0	4228	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::InsertInAddressOrderAllowRepeats(const T* anEntry)
sl@0	4229	/**
sl@0	4230	Inserts an object pointer into the array in address order, allowing duplicates.
sl@0	4231
sl@0	4232	If the new object pointer is a duplicate of an existing object pointer in
sl@0	4233	the array, then the new pointer is inserted after the existing one. If more
sl@0	4234	than one duplicate object pointer already exists in the array, then any new
sl@0	4235	duplicate pointer is inserted after the last one.
sl@0	4236
sl@0	4237	The function assumes that existing object pointers within the array are in
sl@0	4238	address order.
sl@0	4239
sl@0	4240	@param anEntry The object pointer to be inserted.
sl@0	4241
sl@0	4242	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	4243	wide error codes.
sl@0	4244	*/
sl@0	4245	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,ETrue); }
sl@0	4246
sl@0	4247
sl@0	4248
sl@0	4249
sl@0	4250	template <class T>
sl@0	4251	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::InsertInOrderAllowRepeats(const T* anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
sl@0	4252	/**
sl@0	4253	Inserts an object pointer into the array so that the object itself is in object
sl@0	4254	order, allowing duplicates
sl@0	4255
sl@0	4256	The algorithm for determining the order of two class T objects is provided
sl@0	4257	by a function supplied by the caller.
sl@0	4258
sl@0	4259	If the specified object is a duplicate of an existing object, then the new
sl@0	4260	pointer is inserted after the pointer to the existing object. If more than
sl@0	4261	one duplicate object already exists, then the new pointer is inserted after
sl@0	4262	the pointer to the last one.
sl@0	4263
sl@0	4264	@param anEntry The object pointer to be inserted.
sl@0	4265	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	4266	of two class T objects.
sl@0	4267
sl@0	4268	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	4269	wide error codes.
sl@0	4270	*/
sl@0	4271	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsq(anEntry,anOrder,ETrue); }
sl@0	4272
sl@0	4273
sl@0	4274
sl@0	4275
sl@0	4276	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	4277	template <class T>
sl@0	4278	inline RPointerArray<T>::RPointerArray(T** aEntries, TInt aCount)
sl@0	4279	: RPointerArrayBase((TAny **)aEntries, aCount)
sl@0	4280	/**
sl@0	4281	C++ constructor with a pointer to the first array entry in a pre-existing
sl@0	4282	array, and the number of entries in that array.
sl@0	4283
sl@0	4284	This constructor takes a pointer to a pre-existing set of entries of type
sl@0	4285	pointer to class T, which is owned by another RPointerArray object. Ownership
sl@0	4286	of the set of entries still resides with the original RPointerArray object.
sl@0	4287
sl@0	4288	@param aEntries A pointer to the first entry of type pointer to class T in
sl@0	4289	the set of entries belonging to the existing array.
sl@0	4290	@param aCount The number of entries in the existing array. The granularity of
sl@0	4291	this array is set to this value.
sl@0	4292
sl@0	4293	@panic USER 156, if aCount is not positive.
sl@0	4294	*/
sl@0	4295	{}
sl@0	4296
sl@0	4297
sl@0	4298
sl@0	4299
sl@0	4300	template <class T>
sl@0	4301	inline void RPointerArray<T>::GranularCompress()
sl@0	4302	/**
sl@0	4303	Compresses the array down to a granular boundary.
sl@0	4304
sl@0	4305	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient
sl@0	4306	for its contained object pointers. Adding new object pointers to the array
sl@0	4307	does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of
sl@0	4308	pointers reaches a multiple of the granularity.
sl@0	4309	*/
sl@0	4310	{RPointerArrayBase::GranularCompress();}
sl@0	4311
sl@0	4312
sl@0	4313
sl@0	4314
sl@0	4315	template <class T>
sl@0	4316	inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Reserve(TInt aCount)
sl@0	4317	/**
sl@0	4318	Reserves space for the specified number of elements.
sl@0	4319
sl@0	4320	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient
sl@0	4321	to hold the number of object pointers specified. Adding new object pointers to the array
sl@0	4322	does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of
sl@0	4323	pointers exceeds the specified count.
sl@0	4324
sl@0	4325	@param aCount The number of object pointers for which space should be reserved
sl@0	4326	@return KErrNone If the operation completed successfully
sl@0	4327	@return KErrNoMemory If the requested amount of memory could not be allocated
sl@0	4328	*/
sl@0	4329	{ return RPointerArrayBase::DoReserve(aCount); }
sl@0	4330
sl@0	4331
sl@0	4332
sl@0	4333
sl@0	4334	template <class T>
sl@0	4335	inline void RPointerArray<T>::SortIntoAddressOrder()
sl@0	4336	/**
sl@0	4337	Sorts the object pointers within the array into address order.
sl@0	4338	*/
sl@0	4339	{ HeapSortUnsigned(); }
sl@0	4340
sl@0	4341
sl@0	4342
sl@0	4343
sl@0	4344	template <class T>
sl@0	4345	inline void RPointerArray<T>::Sort(TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
sl@0	4346	/**
sl@0	4347	Sorts the object pointers within the array.
sl@0	4348
sl@0	4349	The sort order of the pointers is based on the order of the referenced objects.
sl@0	4350	The referenced object order is determined by an algorithm supplied by the
sl@0	4351	caller and packaged as a TLinerOrder<T>.
sl@0	4352
sl@0	4353	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	4354	of two class T objects.
sl@0	4355	*/
sl@0	4356	{ HeapSort(anOrder); }
sl@0	4357
sl@0	4358
sl@0	4359
sl@0	4360
sl@0	4361	template <class T>
sl@0	4362	inline TArray<T*> RPointerArray<T>::Array() const
sl@0	4363	/**
sl@0	4364	Constructs and returns a generic array.
sl@0	4365
sl@0	4366	@return A generic array representing this array.
sl@0	4367
sl@0	4368	@see TArray
sl@0	4369	*/
sl@0	4370	{ return TArray<T>(GetCount,GetElementPtr,(const CBase)this); }
sl@0	4371	#endif
sl@0	4372
sl@0	4373
sl@0	4374
sl@0	4375	template <class T>
sl@0	4376	void RPointerArray<T>::ResetAndDestroy()
sl@0	4377	/**
sl@0	4378	Empties the array and deletes the referenced objects.
sl@0	4379
sl@0	4380	It frees all memory allocated to the array and resets the internal state so
sl@0	4381	that it is ready to be reused. The function also deletes all of the objects
sl@0	4382	whose pointers are contained by the array.
sl@0	4383
sl@0	4384	This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to this function.
sl@0	4385	*/
sl@0	4386	{
sl@0	4387	TInt c=Count();
sl@0	4388	T pE=(T)Entries();
sl@0	4389	ZeroCount();
sl@0	4390	TInt i;
sl@0	4391	for (i=0; i<c; i++)
sl@0	4392	{
sl@0	4393	delete *pE;
sl@0	4394	pE++;
sl@0	4395	}
sl@0	4396	Reset();
sl@0	4397	}
sl@0	4398
sl@0	4399
sl@0	4400
sl@0	4401	// Specialization for RPointerArray<TAny>
sl@0	4402
sl@0	4403	/**
sl@0	4404	Default C++ constructor.
sl@0	4405
sl@0	4406	This constructs an array object for an array of TAny pointers with default
sl@0	4407	granularity, which is 8.
sl@0	4408	*/
sl@0	4409	inline RPointerArray<TAny>::RPointerArray()
sl@0	4410	: RPointerArrayBase()
sl@0	4411	{}
sl@0	4412
sl@0	4413
sl@0	4414
sl@0	4415
sl@0	4416	/**
sl@0	4417	C++ constructor with granularity.
sl@0	4418
sl@0	4419	This constructs an array object for an array of TAny pointers with the specified
sl@0	4420	granularity.
sl@0	4421
sl@0	4422	@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
sl@0	4423
sl@0	4424	@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive, or greater than or equal
sl@0	4425	to 0x10000000.
sl@0	4426	*/
sl@0	4427	inline RPointerArray<TAny>::RPointerArray(TInt aGranularity)
sl@0	4428	: RPointerArrayBase(aGranularity)
sl@0	4429	{}
sl@0	4430
sl@0	4431
sl@0	4432
sl@0	4433
sl@0	4434	/**
sl@0	4435	C++ constructor with minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
sl@0	4436
sl@0	4437	This constructs an array object for an array of TAny pointers with the specified
sl@0	4438	minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
sl@0	4439
sl@0	4440	@param aMinGrowBy The minimum growth step of the array. Must be between 1 and
sl@0	4441	65535 inclusive.
sl@0	4442	@param aFactor The factor by which the array grows, multiplied by 256.
sl@0	4443	For example 512 specifies a factor of 2. Must be between 257
sl@0	4444	and 32767 inclusive.
sl@0	4445
sl@0	4446	@panic USER 192, if aMinGrowBy<=0 or aMinGrowBy>65535.
sl@0	4447	@panic USER 193, if aFactor<=257 or aFactor>32767.
sl@0	4448	*/
sl@0	4449	inline RPointerArray<TAny>::RPointerArray(TInt aMinGrowBy, TInt aFactor)
sl@0	4450	: RPointerArrayBase(aMinGrowBy, aFactor)
sl@0	4451	{}
sl@0	4452
sl@0	4453
sl@0	4454
sl@0	4455
sl@0	4456	inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::Close()
sl@0	4457	/**
sl@0	4458	Closes the array and frees all memory allocated to it.
sl@0	4459
sl@0	4460	The function must be called before this array object goes out of scope.
sl@0	4461
sl@0	4462	Note that the function does not delete the objects whose pointers are contained
sl@0	4463	in the array.
sl@0	4464	*/
sl@0	4465	{RPointerArrayBase::Close();}
sl@0	4466
sl@0	4467
sl@0	4468
sl@0	4469
sl@0	4470	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::Count() const
sl@0	4471	/**
sl@0	4472	Gets the number of pointers in the array.
sl@0	4473
sl@0	4474	@return The number of pointers in the array.
sl@0	4475	*/
sl@0	4476	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Count(); }
sl@0	4477
sl@0	4478
sl@0	4479
sl@0	4480
sl@0	4481	inline TAny* const& RPointerArray<TAny>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
sl@0	4482	/**
sl@0	4483	Gets a reference to the pointer located at the specified
sl@0	4484	position within the array.
sl@0	4485
sl@0	4486	The compiler chooses this option if the returned reference is used in
sl@0	4487	an expression where the reference cannot be modified.
sl@0	4488
sl@0	4489	@param anIndex The position of the pointer within the array. The
sl@0	4490	position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object
sl@0	4491	pointer at the beginning of the array.
sl@0	4492
sl@0	4493	@return A const reference to the pointer at position anIndex within
sl@0	4494	the array.
sl@0	4495
sl@0	4496	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	4497	objects currently in the array.
sl@0	4498	*/
sl@0	4499	{return At(anIndex);}
sl@0	4500
sl@0	4501
sl@0	4502
sl@0	4503
sl@0	4504	inline TAny*& RPointerArray<TAny>::operator[](TInt anIndex)
sl@0	4505	/**
sl@0	4506	Gets a reference to the pointer located at the specified
sl@0	4507	position within the array.
sl@0	4508
sl@0	4509	The compiler chooses this option if the returned reference is used in
sl@0	4510	an expression where the reference can be modified.
sl@0	4511
sl@0	4512	@param anIndex The position of the pointer within the array. The
sl@0	4513	position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object
sl@0	4514	pointer at the beginning of the array.
sl@0	4515
sl@0	4516	@return A non-const reference to the pointer at position anIndex within
sl@0	4517	the array.
sl@0	4518
sl@0	4519	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	4520	objects currently in the array.
sl@0	4521	*/
sl@0	4522	{return At(anIndex);}
sl@0	4523
sl@0	4524
sl@0	4525
sl@0	4526
sl@0	4527	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::Append(const TAny* anEntry)
sl@0	4528	/**
sl@0	4529	Appends an pointer onto the array.
sl@0	4530
sl@0	4531	@param anEntry The pointer to be appended.
sl@0	4532
sl@0	4533	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	4534	wide error codes.
sl@0	4535	*/
sl@0	4536	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Append(anEntry); }
sl@0	4537
sl@0	4538
sl@0	4539
sl@0	4540
sl@0	4541	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::Insert(const TAny* anEntry, TInt aPos)
sl@0	4542	/**
sl@0	4543	Inserts an pointer into the array at the specified position.
sl@0	4544
sl@0	4545	@param anEntry The pointer to be inserted.
sl@0	4546	@param aPos The position within the array where the pointer is to be
sl@0	4547	inserted. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies
sl@0	4548	that a pointer is inserted at the beginning of the array.
sl@0	4549
sl@0	4550	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	4551	wide error codes.
sl@0	4552
sl@0	4553	@panic USER 131, if aPos is negative, or is greater than the number of object
sl@0	4554	pointers currently in the array.
sl@0	4555	*/
sl@0	4556	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Insert(anEntry,aPos); }
sl@0	4557
sl@0	4558
sl@0	4559
sl@0	4560
sl@0	4561	inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::Remove(TInt anIndex)
sl@0	4562	/**
sl@0	4563	Removes the pointer at the specified position from the array.
sl@0	4564
sl@0	4565	Note that the function does not delete the object whose pointer is removed.
sl@0	4566
sl@0	4567	@param anIndex The position within the array from where the pointer
sl@0	4568	is to be removed. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
sl@0	4569	implies that a pointer at the beginning of the array is to be
sl@0	4570	removed.
sl@0	4571
sl@0	4572	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	4573	objects currently in the array.
sl@0	4574	*/
sl@0	4575	{RPointerArrayBase::Remove(anIndex);}
sl@0	4576
sl@0	4577
sl@0	4578
sl@0	4579
sl@0	4580	inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::Compress()
sl@0	4581	/**
sl@0	4582	Compresses the array down to a minimum.
sl@0	4583
sl@0	4584	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is just
sl@0	4585	sufficient for its contained pointers.
sl@0	4586	Subsequently adding a new pointer to the array
sl@0	4587	always results in a re-allocation of memory.
sl@0	4588	*/
sl@0	4589	{RPointerArrayBase::Compress();}
sl@0	4590
sl@0	4591
sl@0	4592
sl@0	4593
sl@0	4594	inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::Reset()
sl@0	4595	/**
sl@0	4596	Empties the array.
sl@0	4597
sl@0	4598	It frees all memory allocated to the array and resets the internal state so
sl@0	4599	that it is ready to be reused.
sl@0	4600
sl@0	4601	This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to this
sl@0	4602	function.
sl@0	4603
sl@0	4604	Note that the function does not delete the objects whose pointers are contained
sl@0	4605	in the array.
sl@0	4606	*/
sl@0	4607	{RPointerArrayBase::Reset();}
sl@0	4608
sl@0	4609
sl@0	4610
sl@0	4611
sl@0	4612	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::Find(const TAny* anEntry) const
sl@0	4613	/**
sl@0	4614	Finds the first pointer in the array which matches the specified pointer, using
sl@0	4615	a sequential search.
sl@0	4616
sl@0	4617	Matching is based on the comparison of pointers.
sl@0	4618
sl@0	4619	The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There
sl@0	4620	is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
sl@0	4621
sl@0	4622	@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
sl@0	4623	@return The index of the first matching pointer within the array.
sl@0	4624	KErrNotFound, if no matching pointer can be found.
sl@0	4625	*/
sl@0	4626	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Find(anEntry); }
sl@0	4627
sl@0	4628
sl@0	4629
sl@0	4630
sl@0	4631	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::FindReverse(const TAny* anEntry) const
sl@0	4632	/**
sl@0	4633	Finds the last pointer in the array which matches the specified pointer, using
sl@0	4634	a sequential search.
sl@0	4635
sl@0	4636	Matching is based on the comparison of pointers.
sl@0	4637
sl@0	4638	The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There
sl@0	4639	is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
sl@0	4640
sl@0	4641	@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
sl@0	4642	@return The index of the last matching pointer within the array.
sl@0	4643	KErrNotFound, if no matching pointer can be found.
sl@0	4644	*/
sl@0	4645	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindReverse(anEntry); }
sl@0	4646
sl@0	4647
sl@0	4648
sl@0	4649
sl@0	4650	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::FindInAddressOrder(const TAny* anEntry) const
sl@0	4651	/**
sl@0	4652	Finds the pointer in the array that matches the specified object
sl@0	4653	pointer, using a binary search technique.
sl@0	4654
sl@0	4655	The function assumes that pointers in the array are in address order.
sl@0	4656
sl@0	4657	@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
sl@0	4658
sl@0	4659	@return The index of the matching pointer within the array or KErrNotFound
sl@0	4660	if no suitable pointer can be found.
sl@0	4661	*/
sl@0	4662	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry); }
sl@0	4663
sl@0	4664
sl@0	4665
sl@0	4666
sl@0	4667	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::FindInAddressOrder(const TAny* anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
sl@0	4668	/**
sl@0	4669	Finds the pointer in the array that matches the specified object
sl@0	4670	pointer, using a binary search technique.
sl@0	4671
sl@0	4672	The function assumes that pointers in the array are in address order.
sl@0	4673
sl@0	4674	@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
sl@0	4675	@param anIndex A TInt supplied by the caller. On return, contains an index
sl@0	4676	value:
sl@0	4677	If the function returns KErrNone, this is the index of the
sl@0	4678	matching pointer within the array.
sl@0	4679	If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
sl@0	4680	last pointer within the array which logically
sl@0	4681	precedes anEntry.
sl@0	4682
sl@0	4683	@return KErrNone, if a matching pointer is found.
sl@0	4684	KErrNotFound, if no suitable pointer can be found.
sl@0	4685	*/
sl@0	4686	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,anIndex); }
sl@0	4687
sl@0	4688
sl@0	4689
sl@0	4690
sl@0	4691	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::SpecificFindInAddressOrder(const TAny* anEntry, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	4692	/**
sl@0	4693	Finds the pointer in the array that matches the specified pointer, using a
sl@0	4694	binary search technique.
sl@0	4695
sl@0	4696	Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last
sl@0	4697	or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	4698
sl@0	4699	The function assumes that pointers in the array are in address order.
sl@0	4700
sl@0	4701	@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
sl@0	4702	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or
sl@0	4703	any match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	4704
sl@0	4705	@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
sl@0	4706	index of a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the
sl@0	4707	value of aMode:
sl@0	4708	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	4709	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	4710	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	4711	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
sl@0	4712	the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	4713
sl@0	4714	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	4715	*/
sl@0	4716	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry, aMode); }
sl@0	4717
sl@0	4718
sl@0	4719
sl@0	4720
sl@0	4721	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::SpecificFindInAddressOrder(const TAny* anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	4722	/**
sl@0	4723	Finds the pointer in the array that matches the specified pointer, using a
sl@0	4724	binary search technique.
sl@0	4725
sl@0	4726	Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last
sl@0	4727	or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	4728
sl@0	4729	The function assumes that pointers in the array are in address order.
sl@0	4730
sl@0	4731	@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
sl@0	4732	@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an
sl@0	4733	index value depending on whether a match is found and on the
sl@0	4734	value of aMode.
sl@0	4735	If there is no matching element in the array, then this is
sl@0	4736	the index of the first element in the array that is bigger than
sl@0	4737	the element being searched for - if no elements in the array are
sl@0	4738	bigger, then the index value is the same as the total number of
sl@0	4739	elements in the array. If there is a matching element, then what
sl@0	4740	the index refers to depends on the value of aMode:
sl@0	4741	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	4742	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	4743	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows the
sl@0	4744	last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
sl@0	4745	then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	4746
sl@0	4747	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any
sl@0	4748	match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	4749
sl@0	4750	@return KErrNone, if a matching pointer is found.
sl@0	4751	KErrNotFound, if no suitable pointer can be found.
sl@0	4752
sl@0	4753	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	4754	*/
sl@0	4755	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,anIndex,aMode); }
sl@0	4756
sl@0	4757
sl@0	4758
sl@0	4759
sl@0	4760	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::InsertInAddressOrder(const TAny* anEntry)
sl@0	4761	/**
sl@0	4762	Inserts an pointer into the array in address order.
sl@0	4763
sl@0	4764	No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
sl@0	4765	an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
sl@0	4766
sl@0	4767	The function assumes that existing pointers within the array are in
sl@0	4768	address order.
sl@0	4769
sl@0	4770	@param anEntry The pointer to be inserted.
sl@0	4771
sl@0	4772	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
sl@0	4773	KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
sl@0	4774	to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
sl@0	4775	error codes.
sl@0	4776	*/
sl@0	4777	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,EFalse); }
sl@0	4778
sl@0	4779
sl@0	4780
sl@0	4781
sl@0	4782	inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::InsertInAddressOrderAllowRepeats(const TAny* anEntry)
sl@0	4783	/**
sl@0	4784	Inserts an pointer into the array in address order, allowing duplicates.
sl@0	4785
sl@0	4786	If the new pointer is a duplicate of an existing pointer in
sl@0	4787	the array, then the new pointer is inserted after the existing one. If more
sl@0	4788	than one duplicate pointer already exists in the array, then any new
sl@0	4789	duplicate pointer is inserted after the last one.
sl@0	4790
sl@0	4791	The function assumes that existing pointers within the array are in
sl@0	4792	address order.
sl@0	4793
sl@0	4794	@param anEntry The pointer to be inserted.
sl@0	4795
sl@0	4796	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	4797	wide error codes.
sl@0	4798	*/
sl@0	4799	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,ETrue); }
sl@0	4800
sl@0	4801
sl@0	4802
sl@0	4803
sl@0	4804	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	4805	inline RPointerArray<TAny>::RPointerArray(TAny** aEntries, TInt aCount)
sl@0	4806	: RPointerArrayBase((TAny **)aEntries, aCount)
sl@0	4807	/**
sl@0	4808	C++ constructor with a pointer to the first array entry in a pre-existing
sl@0	4809	array, and the number of entries in that array.
sl@0	4810
sl@0	4811	This constructor takes a pointer to a pre-existing set of entries of type TAny*,
sl@0	4812	which is owned by another RPointerArray object. Ownership of the set of entries
sl@0	4813	still resides with the original RPointerArray object.
sl@0	4814
sl@0	4815	@param aEntries A pointer to the first entry of type TAny* in the set of entries
sl@0	4816	belonging to the existing array.
sl@0	4817	@param aCount The number of entries in the existing array. The granularity of
sl@0	4818	this array is set to this value.
sl@0	4819
sl@0	4820	@panic USER 156, if aCount is not positive.
sl@0	4821	*/
sl@0	4822	{}
sl@0	4823
sl@0	4824
sl@0	4825
sl@0	4826
sl@0	4827	inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::GranularCompress()
sl@0	4828	/**
sl@0	4829	Compresses the array down to a granular boundary.
sl@0	4830
sl@0	4831	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient
sl@0	4832	for its contained pointers. Adding new pointers to the array
sl@0	4833	does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of
sl@0	4834	pointers reaches a multiple of the granularity.
sl@0	4835	*/
sl@0	4836	{RPointerArrayBase::GranularCompress();}
sl@0	4837
sl@0	4838
sl@0	4839
sl@0	4840
sl@0	4841	inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::SortIntoAddressOrder()
sl@0	4842	/**
sl@0	4843	Sorts the pointers within the array into address order.
sl@0	4844	*/
sl@0	4845	{ HeapSortUnsigned(); }
sl@0	4846
sl@0	4847
sl@0	4848
sl@0	4849
sl@0	4850	inline TArray<TAny*> RPointerArray<TAny>::Array() const
sl@0	4851	/**
sl@0	4852	Constructs and returns a generic array.
sl@0	4853
sl@0	4854	@return A generic array representing this array.
sl@0	4855
sl@0	4856	@see TArray
sl@0	4857	*/
sl@0	4858	{ return TArray<TAny>(GetCount,GetElementPtr,(const CBase)this); }
sl@0	4859	#endif
sl@0	4860
sl@0	4861
sl@0	4862
sl@0	4863	template <class T>
sl@0	4864	inline RArray<T>::RArray()
sl@0	4865	: RArrayBase(sizeof(T))
sl@0	4866	/**
sl@0	4867	Default C++ constructor.
sl@0	4868
sl@0	4869	This constructs an array object for an array of type class T objects with
sl@0	4870	default granularity and key offset value. The default granularity is 8 and
sl@0	4871	the defaul key offset value is zero.
sl@0	4872
sl@0	4873	@panic USER 129, if the size of class T is not positive or is not less
sl@0	4874	than 640.
sl@0	4875	*/
sl@0	4876	{}
sl@0	4877
sl@0	4878
sl@0	4879
sl@0	4880
sl@0	4881	template <class T>
sl@0	4882	inline RArray<T>::RArray(TInt aGranularity)
sl@0	4883	: RArrayBase(sizeof(T),aGranularity)
sl@0	4884	/**
sl@0	4885	C++ constructor with granularity.
sl@0	4886
sl@0	4887	This constructs an array object for an array of type class T objects with
sl@0	4888	a specified granularity and default key offset value. The default key offset
sl@0	4889	value is zero.
sl@0	4890
sl@0	4891	@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
sl@0	4892
sl@0	4893	@panic USER 129, if the size of class T is not positive or is not less
sl@0	4894	than 640.
sl@0	4895	@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive or the product of this
sl@0	4896	value and the size of class T is not less than 0x10000000.
sl@0	4897	*/
sl@0	4898	{}
sl@0	4899
sl@0	4900
sl@0	4901
sl@0	4902
sl@0	4903	template <class T>
sl@0	4904	inline RArray<T>::RArray(TInt aGranularity, TInt aKeyOffset)
sl@0	4905	: RArrayBase(sizeof(T),aGranularity,aKeyOffset)
sl@0	4906	/**
sl@0	4907	C++ constructor with granularity and key offset.
sl@0	4908
sl@0	4909	This constructs an array object for an array of type class T objects with
sl@0	4910	a specified granularity and a specified key offset value.
sl@0	4911
sl@0	4912	@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
sl@0	4913	@param aKeyOffset The key offset.
sl@0	4914
sl@0	4915	@panic USER 129, if the size of class T is not positive or is not less
sl@0	4916	than 640.
sl@0	4917	@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive or the product of this
sl@0	4918	value and the size of class T is not less than 0x10000000.
sl@0	4919	@panic USER 128, if aKeyOffset is not positive, or is not less than the
sl@0	4920	size of class T, or is not a multiple of 4.
sl@0	4921	*/
sl@0	4922	{}
sl@0	4923
sl@0	4924
sl@0	4925
sl@0	4926
sl@0	4927	/**
sl@0	4928	C++ constructor with minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
sl@0	4929
sl@0	4930	This constructs an array object for an array of class T objects with the
sl@0	4931	specified minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
sl@0	4932
sl@0	4933	@param aMinGrowBy The minimum growth step of the array. Must be between 1 and
sl@0	4934	65535 inclusive.
sl@0	4935	@param aKeyOffset The key offset.
sl@0	4936	@param aFactor The factor by which the array grows, multiplied by 256.
sl@0	4937	For example 512 specifies a factor of 2. Must be between 257
sl@0	4938	and 32767 inclusive.
sl@0	4939
sl@0	4940	@panic USER 129, if the size of class T is not positive or is not less than 640.
sl@0	4941	@panic USER 128, if aKeyOffset is negative, or is not less than the
sl@0	4942	size of class T, or is not a multiple of 4.
sl@0	4943	@panic USER 192, if aMinGrowBy<=0 or aMinGrowBy>65535.
sl@0	4944	@panic USER 193, if aFactor<=257 or aFactor>32767.
sl@0	4945	*/
sl@0	4946	template <class T>
sl@0	4947	inline RArray<T>::RArray(TInt aMinGrowBy, TInt aKeyOffset, TInt aFactor)
sl@0	4948	: RArrayBase(sizeof(T), aMinGrowBy, aKeyOffset, aFactor)
sl@0	4949	{}
sl@0	4950
sl@0	4951
sl@0	4952
sl@0	4953
sl@0	4954	template <class T>
sl@0	4955	inline RArray<T>::RArray(TInt aEntrySize,T* aEntries, TInt aCount)
sl@0	4956	: RArrayBase(aEntrySize,aEntries,aCount)
sl@0	4957	/**
sl@0	4958	C++ constructor with size of entry, a pointer to the first array entry in a
sl@0	4959	pre-existing array, and the number of entries in that array.
sl@0	4960
sl@0	4961	This constructor takes a pointer to a pre-existing set of entries of type
sl@0	4962	class T objects owned by another RArray object. Ownership of the set of entries
sl@0	4963	still resides with the original RArray object.
sl@0	4964
sl@0	4965	This array is assigned a default granularity and key offset value. The default
sl@0	4966	granularity is 8 and the default key offset value is zero.
sl@0	4967
sl@0	4968	The purpose of constructing an array in this way is to allow sorting and
sl@0	4969	finding operations to be done without further allocation of memory.
sl@0	4970
sl@0	4971	@param aEntrySize The size of an entry in the existing array.
sl@0	4972	@param aEntries A pointer to the first entry of type class T in the set of
sl@0	4973	entries belonging to the existing array.
sl@0	4974	@param aCount The number of entries in the existing array.
sl@0	4975
sl@0	4976	@panic USER 129, if aEntrySize is not positive or is not less than 640.
sl@0	4977	@panic USER 156, if aCount is not positive.
sl@0	4978	*/
sl@0	4979	{}
sl@0	4980
sl@0	4981
sl@0	4982
sl@0	4983
sl@0	4984	template <class T>
sl@0	4985	inline void RArray<T>::Close()
sl@0	4986	/**
sl@0	4987	Closes the array and frees all memory allocated to the array.
sl@0	4988
sl@0	4989	The function must be called before this array object is destroyed.
sl@0	4990	*/
sl@0	4991	{RArrayBase::Close();}
sl@0	4992
sl@0	4993
sl@0	4994
sl@0	4995
sl@0	4996	template <class T>
sl@0	4997	inline TInt RArray<T>::Count() const
sl@0	4998	/**
sl@0	4999	Gets the number of objects in the array.
sl@0	5000
sl@0	5001	@return The number of objects in the array.
sl@0	5002	*/
sl@0	5003	{return RArrayBase::Count();}
sl@0	5004
sl@0	5005
sl@0	5006
sl@0	5007
sl@0	5008	template <class T>
sl@0	5009	inline const T& RArray<T>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
sl@0	5010	/**
sl@0	5011	Gets a reference to an object located at a specified position within the array.
sl@0	5012
sl@0	5013	The compiler chooses this function if the returned reference is used in an
sl@0	5014	expression where the reference cannot be modified.
sl@0	5015
sl@0	5016	@param anIndex The position of the object within the array. The position is
sl@0	5017	relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object at the beginning
sl@0	5018	of the array.
sl@0	5019
sl@0	5020	@return A const reference to the object at position anIndex within the array.
sl@0	5021
sl@0	5022	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative or is greater than the number of
sl@0	5023	objects currently in the array
sl@0	5024	*/
sl@0	5025	{return (const T)At(anIndex); }
sl@0	5026
sl@0	5027
sl@0	5028
sl@0	5029
sl@0	5030	template <class T>
sl@0	5031	inline T& RArray<T>::operator[](TInt anIndex)
sl@0	5032	/**
sl@0	5033	Gets a reference to an object located at a specified position within the array.
sl@0	5034
sl@0	5035	The compiler chooses this function if the returned reference is used in an
sl@0	5036	expression where the reference can be modified.
sl@0	5037
sl@0	5038	@param anIndex The position of the object within the array. The position is
sl@0	5039	relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object at the beginning
sl@0	5040	of the array.
sl@0	5041
sl@0	5042	@return A non-const reference to the object at position anIndex within the array.
sl@0	5043
sl@0	5044	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative or is greater than the number of
sl@0	5045	objects currently in the array
sl@0	5046	*/
sl@0	5047	{return (T)At(anIndex); }
sl@0	5048
sl@0	5049
sl@0	5050
sl@0	5051
sl@0	5052	template <class T>
sl@0	5053	inline TInt RArray<T>::Append(const T& anEntry)
sl@0	5054	/**
sl@0	5055	Apends an object onto the array.
sl@0	5056
sl@0	5057	@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be appended.
sl@0	5058
sl@0	5059	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	5060	wide error codes.
sl@0	5061	*/
sl@0	5062	{return RArrayBase::Append(&anEntry);}
sl@0	5063
sl@0	5064
sl@0	5065
sl@0	5066
sl@0	5067	template <class T>
sl@0	5068	inline TInt RArray<T>::Insert(const T& anEntry, TInt aPos)
sl@0	5069	/**
sl@0	5070	Inserts an object into the array at a specified position.
sl@0	5071
sl@0	5072	@param anEntry The class T object to be inserted.
sl@0	5073	@param aPos The position within the array where the object is to
sl@0	5074	be inserted. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
sl@0	5075	implies that an object is inserted at the beginning of
sl@0	5076	the array.
sl@0	5077
sl@0	5078	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	5079	wide error codes.
sl@0	5080
sl@0	5081	@panic USER 131, if aPos is negative or is greater than the number of objects
sl@0	5082	currently in the array.
sl@0	5083	*/
sl@0	5084	{return RArrayBase::Insert(&anEntry,aPos);}
sl@0	5085
sl@0	5086
sl@0	5087
sl@0	5088
sl@0	5089	template <class T>
sl@0	5090	inline void RArray<T>::Remove(TInt anIndex)
sl@0	5091	/**
sl@0	5092	Removes the object at a specified position from the array.
sl@0	5093
sl@0	5094	@param anIndex The position within the array from where the object is to be
sl@0	5095	removed. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies
sl@0	5096	that an object at the beginning of the array is to be removed.
sl@0	5097
sl@0	5098	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative or is greater than the number of
sl@0	5099	objects currently in the array.
sl@0	5100	*/
sl@0	5101	{RArrayBase::Remove(anIndex);}
sl@0	5102
sl@0	5103
sl@0	5104
sl@0	5105
sl@0	5106	template <class T>
sl@0	5107	inline void RArray<T>::Compress()
sl@0	5108	/**
sl@0	5109	Compresses the array down to a minimum.
sl@0	5110
sl@0	5111	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is just
sl@0	5112	sufficient for its contained objects. Subsequently adding a new object to the
sl@0	5113	array always results in a re-allocation of memory.
sl@0	5114	*/
sl@0	5115	{RArrayBase::Compress();}
sl@0	5116
sl@0	5117
sl@0	5118
sl@0	5119
sl@0	5120	template <class T>
sl@0	5121	inline void RArray<T>::Reset()
sl@0	5122	/**
sl@0	5123	Empties the array, so that it is ready to be reused.
sl@0	5124
sl@0	5125	The function frees all memory allocated to the array and resets the internal
sl@0	5126	state so that it is ready to be reused.
sl@0	5127
sl@0	5128	This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to this function.
sl@0	5129	*/
sl@0	5130	{RArrayBase::Reset();}
sl@0	5131
sl@0	5132
sl@0	5133
sl@0	5134
sl@0	5135	template <class T>
sl@0	5136	inline TInt RArray<T>::Find(const T& anEntry) const
sl@0	5137	/**
sl@0	5138	Finds the first object in the array which matches the specified object using
sl@0	5139	a sequential search.
sl@0	5140
sl@0	5141	Matching is based on the comparison of a TInt value at the key offset position
sl@0	5142	within the objects.
sl@0	5143
sl@0	5144	For classes which define their own equality operator (==), the alternative method
sl@0	5145	Find(const T& anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) is recommended.
sl@0	5146
sl@0	5147	The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There
sl@0	5148	is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
sl@0	5149
sl@0	5150	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5151
sl@0	5152	@return The index of the first matching object within the array.
sl@0	5153	KErrNotFound, if no matching object can be found.
sl@0	5154	*/
sl@0	5155	{return RArrayBase::Find(&anEntry);}
sl@0	5156
sl@0	5157
sl@0	5158
sl@0	5159
sl@0	5160	template <class T>
sl@0	5161	inline TInt RArray<T>::Find(const T& anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) const
sl@0	5162	/**
sl@0	5163	Finds the first object in the array which matches the specified object using
sl@0	5164	a sequential search and a matching algorithm.
sl@0	5165
sl@0	5166	The algorithm for determining whether two class T type objects match is provided
sl@0	5167	by a function supplied by the caller.
sl@0	5168
sl@0	5169	Such a function need not be supplied if an equality operator (==) is defined for class T.
sl@0	5170	In this case, default construction of anIdentity provides matching, as in the example below:
sl@0	5171
sl@0	5172	@code
sl@0	5173	//Construct a TPoint and append to an RArray<TPoint>
sl@0	5174	TPoint p1(0,0);
sl@0	5175	RArray<TPoint> points;
sl@0	5176	points.AppendL(p1);
sl@0	5177	//Find position of p1 in points using TIdentityRelation<TPoint> default construction
sl@0	5178	TInt r = points.Find(p1, TIdentityRelation<TPoint>());
sl@0	5179	@endcode
sl@0	5180
sl@0	5181	The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There
sl@0	5182	is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
sl@0	5183
sl@0	5184	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used
sl@0	5185	for matching.
sl@0	5186	@param anIdentity A package encapsulating the function which determines whether
sl@0	5187	two class T type objects match.
sl@0	5188
sl@0	5189	@return The index of the first matching object within the array.
sl@0	5190	KErrNotFound, if no matching object can be found.
sl@0	5191	*/
sl@0	5192	{return RArrayBase::Find(&anEntry,anIdentity);}
sl@0	5193
sl@0	5194
sl@0	5195
sl@0	5196
sl@0	5197	template <class T>
sl@0	5198	inline TInt RArray<T>::FindReverse(const T& anEntry) const
sl@0	5199	/**
sl@0	5200	Finds the last object in the array which matches the specified object using
sl@0	5201	a sequential search.
sl@0	5202
sl@0	5203	Matching is based on the comparison of a TInt value at the key offset position
sl@0	5204	within the objects.
sl@0	5205
sl@0	5206	For classes which define their own equality operator (==), the alternative method
sl@0	5207	FindReverse(const T& anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) is recommended.
sl@0	5208
sl@0	5209	The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There
sl@0	5210	is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
sl@0	5211
sl@0	5212	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5213
sl@0	5214	@return The index of the last matching object within the array.
sl@0	5215	KErrNotFound, if no matching object can be found.
sl@0	5216	*/
sl@0	5217	{return RArrayBase::FindReverse(&anEntry);}
sl@0	5218
sl@0	5219
sl@0	5220
sl@0	5221
sl@0	5222	template <class T>
sl@0	5223	inline TInt RArray<T>::FindReverse(const T& anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) const
sl@0	5224	/**
sl@0	5225	Finds the last object in the array which matches the specified object using
sl@0	5226	a sequential search and a matching algorithm.
sl@0	5227
sl@0	5228	The algorithm for determining whether two class T type objects match is provided
sl@0	5229	by a function supplied by the caller.
sl@0	5230
sl@0	5231	Such a function need not be supplied if an equality operator (==) is defined for class T.
sl@0	5232	In this case, default construction of anIdentity provides matching.
sl@0	5233
sl@0	5234	See Find(const T& anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) for more details.
sl@0	5235
sl@0	5236	The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There
sl@0	5237	is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
sl@0	5238
sl@0	5239	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used
sl@0	5240	for matching.
sl@0	5241	@param anIdentity A package encapsulating the function which determines whether
sl@0	5242	two class T type objects match.
sl@0	5243
sl@0	5244	@return The index of the last matching object within the array.
sl@0	5245	KErrNotFound, if no matching object can be found.
sl@0	5246	*/
sl@0	5247	{return RArrayBase::FindReverse(&anEntry,anIdentity);}
sl@0	5248
sl@0	5249
sl@0	5250
sl@0	5251
sl@0	5252	template <class T>
sl@0	5253	inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInSignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry) const
sl@0	5254	/**
sl@0	5255	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5256	search technique.
sl@0	5257
sl@0	5258	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in signed
sl@0	5259	key order.
sl@0	5260
sl@0	5261	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5262
sl@0	5263	@return The index of the matching object within the array, or KErrNotFound
sl@0	5264	if no matching object can be found.
sl@0	5265	*/
sl@0	5266	{return RArrayBase::FindIsqSigned(&anEntry);}
sl@0	5267
sl@0	5268
sl@0	5269
sl@0	5270
sl@0	5271	template <class T>
sl@0	5272	inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInUnsignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry) const
sl@0	5273	/**
sl@0	5274	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5275	search technique.
sl@0	5276
sl@0	5277	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in unsigned
sl@0	5278	key order.
sl@0	5279
sl@0	5280	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5281
sl@0	5282	@return The index of the matching object within the array, or KErrNotFound
sl@0	5283	if no matching object can be found.
sl@0	5284	*/
sl@0	5285	{return RArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned(&anEntry);}
sl@0	5286
sl@0	5287
sl@0	5288
sl@0	5289
sl@0	5290	template <class T>
sl@0	5291	inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInOrder(const T& anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder) const
sl@0	5292	/**
sl@0	5293	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5294	search technique and an ordering algorithm.
sl@0	5295
sl@0	5296	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object
sl@0	5297	order as determined by an algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as
sl@0	5298	a TLinearOrder<T>.
sl@0	5299
sl@0	5300	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5301	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	5302	of two class T objects.
sl@0	5303
sl@0	5304	@return The index of the matching object within the array, or KErrNotFound if
sl@0	5305	no matching object can be found.
sl@0	5306	*/
sl@0	5307	{return RArrayBase::FindIsq(&anEntry,anOrder);}
sl@0	5308
sl@0	5309
sl@0	5310
sl@0	5311
sl@0	5312	template <class T>
sl@0	5313	inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInSignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
sl@0	5314	/**
sl@0	5315	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5316	search technique.
sl@0	5317
sl@0	5318	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in signed
sl@0	5319	key order.
sl@0	5320
sl@0	5321	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5322	@param anIndex On return contains an index value. If the function returns KErrNone,
sl@0	5323	this is the index of the matching object within the array.
sl@0	5324	If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
sl@0	5325	first element in the array whose key is bigger than the key of the
sl@0	5326	element being sought. If there are no elements in the array with
sl@0	5327	a bigger key, then the index value is the same as the total
sl@0	5328	number of elements in the array.
sl@0	5329	@return KErrNone if a matching object is found, or KErrNotFound if no matching
sl@0	5330	object can be found.
sl@0	5331	*/
sl@0	5332	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearchSigned(&anEntry,anIndex);}
sl@0	5333
sl@0	5334
sl@0	5335
sl@0	5336
sl@0	5337	template <class T>
sl@0	5338	inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInUnsignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
sl@0	5339	/**
sl@0	5340	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5341	search technique.
sl@0	5342
sl@0	5343	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in unsigned
sl@0	5344	key order.
sl@0	5345
sl@0	5346	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5347	@param anIndex On return contains an index value. If the function returns
sl@0	5348	KErrNone, this is the index of the matching object within the
sl@0	5349	array.
sl@0	5350	If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
sl@0	5351	first element in the array whose key is bigger than the key of the
sl@0	5352	element being sought. If there are no elements in the array with
sl@0	5353	a bigger key, then the index value is the same as the total
sl@0	5354	number of elements in the array.
sl@0	5355	@return KErrNone if a matching object is found, or KErrNotFound if no matching
sl@0	5356	object can be found.
sl@0	5357	*/
sl@0	5358	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned(&anEntry,anIndex);}
sl@0	5359
sl@0	5360
sl@0	5361
sl@0	5362
sl@0	5363	template <class T>
sl@0	5364	inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder) const
sl@0	5365	/**
sl@0	5366	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5367	search technique and an ordering algorithm.
sl@0	5368
sl@0	5369	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object
sl@0	5370	order as determined by an algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as
sl@0	5371	a TLinearOrder<T>.
sl@0	5372
sl@0	5373	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5374	@param anIndex On return contains an index value. If the function returns
sl@0	5375	KErrNone, this is the index of the matching object within the
sl@0	5376	array.
sl@0	5377	If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
sl@0	5378	first element in the array that is bigger than the element being
sl@0	5379	searched for - if no elements in the array are bigger, then
sl@0	5380	the index value is the same as the total number of elements in
sl@0	5381	the array.
sl@0	5382	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	5383	of two class T objects.
sl@0	5384
sl@0	5385	@return KErrNone if a matching object is found. KErrNotFound if no matching
sl@0	5386	object can be found.
sl@0	5387	*/
sl@0	5388	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearch(&anEntry,anIndex,anOrder);}
sl@0	5389
sl@0	5390
sl@0	5391
sl@0	5392
sl@0	5393	template <class T>
sl@0	5394	inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInSignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	5395	/**
sl@0	5396	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5397	search technique.
sl@0	5398
sl@0	5399	The element ordering is determined by a signed 32-bit word
sl@0	5400	(the key) embedded in each array element. In the case that there is more than
sl@0	5401	one matching element, finds the first, last or any match as specified by
sl@0	5402	the value of aMode.
sl@0	5403
sl@0	5404	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in signed
sl@0	5405	key order.
sl@0	5406
sl@0	5407	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5408	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or
sl@0	5409	any match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	5410
sl@0	5411	@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
sl@0	5412	index of a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the
sl@0	5413	value of aMode:
sl@0	5414	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	5415	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	5416	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	5417	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
sl@0	5418	the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	5419
sl@0	5420	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	5421	*/
sl@0	5422	{return RArrayBase::FindIsqSigned(&anEntry,aMode);}
sl@0	5423
sl@0	5424
sl@0	5425
sl@0	5426
sl@0	5427	template <class T>
sl@0	5428	inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInUnsignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	5429	/**
sl@0	5430	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5431	search technique.
sl@0	5432
sl@0	5433	The element ordering is determined by an unsigned 32-bit word
sl@0	5434	(the key) embedded in each array element. Where there is more than
sl@0	5435	one matching element, it finds the first, last or any matching element
sl@0	5436	as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	5437
sl@0	5438	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in unsigned
sl@0	5439	key order.
sl@0	5440
sl@0	5441	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5442	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or
sl@0	5443	any match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	5444
sl@0	5445	@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
sl@0	5446	index of a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the
sl@0	5447	value of aMode:
sl@0	5448	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	5449	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	5450	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows the
sl@0	5451	last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
sl@0	5452	then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	5453
sl@0	5454	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	5455	*/
sl@0	5456	{return RArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned(&anEntry,aMode);}
sl@0	5457
sl@0	5458
sl@0	5459
sl@0	5460
sl@0	5461	template <class T>
sl@0	5462	inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInOrder(const T& anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	5463	/**
sl@0	5464	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5465	search technique and an ordering algorithm.
sl@0	5466
sl@0	5467	Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last
sl@0	5468	or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	5469
sl@0	5470	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object
sl@0	5471	order as determined by an algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as
sl@0	5472	a TLinearOrder<T> type.
sl@0	5473
sl@0	5474	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5475	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	5476	of two class T objects.
sl@0	5477	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any
sl@0	5478	match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	5479
sl@0	5480	@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array index
sl@0	5481	of a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the value of
sl@0	5482	aMode:
sl@0	5483	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	5484	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	5485	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	5486	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
sl@0	5487	the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	5488	*/
sl@0	5489	{return RArrayBase::FindIsq(&anEntry,anOrder,aMode);}
sl@0	5490
sl@0	5491
sl@0	5492
sl@0	5493
sl@0	5494	template <class T>
sl@0	5495	inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInSignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	5496	/**
sl@0	5497	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5498	search technique.
sl@0	5499
sl@0	5500	The element ordering is determined by a signed 32-bit word
sl@0	5501	(the key) embedded in each array element. Where there is more than
sl@0	5502	one matching element, finds the first, last or any matching element as
sl@0	5503	specified specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	5504
sl@0	5505	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in signed
sl@0	5506	key order.
sl@0	5507
sl@0	5508	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5509	@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains
sl@0	5510	an index value depending on whether a match is found and on the
sl@0	5511	value of aMode. If there is no matching element in the array,
sl@0	5512	then this is the index of the first element in the array that
sl@0	5513	is bigger than the element being searched for - if no elements
sl@0	5514	in the array are bigger, then the index value is the same as the
sl@0	5515	total number of elements in the array. If there is a matching
sl@0	5516	element, then what the index refers to depends on the value of aMode:
sl@0	5517	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	5518	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	5519	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	5520	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
sl@0	5521	the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	5522	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match,
sl@0	5523	as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	5524
sl@0	5525	@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found;
sl@0	5526	KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	5527	*/
sl@0	5528	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearchSigned(&anEntry,anIndex,aMode);}
sl@0	5529
sl@0	5530
sl@0	5531
sl@0	5532
sl@0	5533	template <class T>
sl@0	5534	inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInUnsignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	5535	/**
sl@0	5536	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5537	search technique.
sl@0	5538
sl@0	5539	The element ordering is determined by an unsigned 32-bit word
sl@0	5540	(the key) embedded in each array element. Where there is more than
sl@0	5541	one matching element, it finds the first, last or any matching element as
sl@0	5542	specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	5543
sl@0	5544	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in unsigned
sl@0	5545	key order.
sl@0	5546
sl@0	5547	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5548	@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an index
sl@0	5549	value depending on whether a match is found and on the value of aMode.
sl@0	5550	If there is no matching element in the array, then this is the index
sl@0	5551	of the first element in the array that is bigger than the element
sl@0	5552	being searched for - if no elements in the array are bigger, then
sl@0	5553	the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	5554	If there is a matching element, then what the index refers to depends on
sl@0	5555	the value of aMode:
sl@0	5556	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	5557	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	5558	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows the
sl@0	5559	last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
sl@0	5560	then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	5561	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match, as defined by one
sl@0	5562	of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	5563	@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found; KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	5564
sl@0	5565	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	5566	*/
sl@0	5567	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned(&anEntry,anIndex,aMode);}
sl@0	5568
sl@0	5569
sl@0	5570
sl@0	5571
sl@0	5572	template <class T>
sl@0	5573	inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	5574	/**
sl@0	5575	Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary
sl@0	5576	search technique and a specified ordering algorithm.
sl@0	5577
sl@0	5578	Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last or
sl@0	5579	any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	5580
sl@0	5581	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object
sl@0	5582	order as determined by an algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as
sl@0	5583	a TLinearOrder<T> type.
sl@0	5584
sl@0	5585	@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
sl@0	5586	@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains
sl@0	5587	an index value depending on whether a match is found and on the
sl@0	5588	value of aMode. If there is no matching element in the array,
sl@0	5589	then this is the index of the first element in the array that
sl@0	5590	is bigger than the element being searched for - if no elements
sl@0	5591	in the array are bigger, then the index value is the same as
sl@0	5592	the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	5593	If there is a matching element, then what the index refers to
sl@0	5594	depends on the value of aMode:
sl@0	5595	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	5596	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	5597	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	5598	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also
sl@0	5599	the last element of the array, then the index value is the same as
sl@0	5600	the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	5601	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	5602	of two class T objects.
sl@0	5603	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match,
sl@0	5604	as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	5605	@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found;
sl@0	5606	KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
sl@0	5607
sl@0	5608	*/
sl@0	5609	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearch(&anEntry,anIndex,anOrder,aMode);}
sl@0	5610
sl@0	5611
sl@0	5612
sl@0	5613
sl@0	5614	template <class T>
sl@0	5615	inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInSignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry)
sl@0	5616	/**
sl@0	5617	Inserts an object into the array in ascending signed key order.
sl@0	5618
sl@0	5619	The order of two class T type objects is based on comparing a TInt value
sl@0	5620	located at the key offset position within the class T object.
sl@0	5621
sl@0	5622	No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
sl@0	5623	an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
sl@0	5624
sl@0	5625	@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
sl@0	5626
sl@0	5627	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
sl@0	5628	KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
sl@0	5629	to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
sl@0	5630	error codes.
sl@0	5631	*/
sl@0	5632	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsqSigned(&anEntry,EFalse);}
sl@0	5633
sl@0	5634
sl@0	5635
sl@0	5636
sl@0	5637	template <class T>
sl@0	5638	inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInUnsignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry)
sl@0	5639	/**
sl@0	5640	Inserts an object into the array in ascending unsigned key order.
sl@0	5641
sl@0	5642	The order of two class T type objects is based on comparing a TUint value
sl@0	5643	located at the key offset position within the class T object.
sl@0	5644
sl@0	5645	No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
sl@0	5646	an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
sl@0	5647
sl@0	5648	@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
sl@0	5649
sl@0	5650	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
sl@0	5651	KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
sl@0	5652	to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
sl@0	5653	error codes.
sl@0	5654	*/
sl@0	5655	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned(&anEntry,EFalse);}
sl@0	5656
sl@0	5657
sl@0	5658
sl@0	5659
sl@0	5660	template <class T>
sl@0	5661	inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInOrder(const T& anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
sl@0	5662	/**
sl@0	5663	Inserts an object of into the array in object order.
sl@0	5664
sl@0	5665	The algorithm for determining the order of two class T type objects is provided
sl@0	5666	by a function supplied by the caller.
sl@0	5667
sl@0	5668	No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
sl@0	5669	an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
sl@0	5670
sl@0	5671	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object
sl@0	5672	order.
sl@0	5673
sl@0	5674	@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
sl@0	5675	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	5676	of two class T objects.
sl@0	5677
sl@0	5678	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
sl@0	5679	KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
sl@0	5680	to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
sl@0	5681	error codes.
sl@0	5682	*/
sl@0	5683	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsq(&anEntry,anOrder,EFalse);}
sl@0	5684
sl@0	5685
sl@0	5686
sl@0	5687
sl@0	5688	template <class T>
sl@0	5689	inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInSignedKeyOrderAllowRepeats(const T& anEntry)
sl@0	5690	/**
sl@0	5691	Inserts an object into the array in ascending signed key order,
sl@0	5692	allowing duplicates.
sl@0	5693
sl@0	5694	The order of two class T type objects is based on comparing a TInt value
sl@0	5695	located at the key offset position within the class T object.
sl@0	5696
sl@0	5697	If anEntry is a duplicate of an existing object in the array, then the new
sl@0	5698	object is inserted after the existing object. If more than one duplicate object
sl@0	5699	already exists in the array, then any new duplicate object is inserted after
sl@0	5700	the last one.
sl@0	5701
sl@0	5702	@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
sl@0	5703
sl@0	5704	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	5705	wide error codes.
sl@0	5706	*/
sl@0	5707	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsqSigned(&anEntry,ETrue);}
sl@0	5708
sl@0	5709
sl@0	5710
sl@0	5711
sl@0	5712	template <class T>
sl@0	5713	inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInUnsignedKeyOrderAllowRepeats(const T& anEntry)
sl@0	5714	/**
sl@0	5715	Inserts an object into the array in ascending unsigned key order, allowing
sl@0	5716	duplicates.
sl@0	5717
sl@0	5718	The order of two class T type objects is based on comparing a TUint value
sl@0	5719	located at the key offset position within the class T object.
sl@0	5720
sl@0	5721	If anEntry is a duplicate of an existing object in the array, then the new
sl@0	5722	object is inserted after the existing object. If more than one duplicate object
sl@0	5723	already exists in the array, then any new duplicate object is inserted after
sl@0	5724	the last one.
sl@0	5725
sl@0	5726	@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
sl@0	5727
sl@0	5728	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	5729	wide error codes.
sl@0	5730	*/
sl@0	5731	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned(&anEntry,ETrue);}
sl@0	5732
sl@0	5733
sl@0	5734
sl@0	5735
sl@0	5736	template <class T>
sl@0	5737	inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInOrderAllowRepeats(const T& anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
sl@0	5738	/**
sl@0	5739	Inserts an object into the array in object order, allowing duplicates.
sl@0	5740
sl@0	5741	The algorithm for determining the order of two class T type objects is provided
sl@0	5742	by a function supplied by the caller.
sl@0	5743
sl@0	5744	If anEntry is a duplicate of an existing object in the array, then the new
sl@0	5745	object is inserted after the existing object. If more than one duplicate object
sl@0	5746	already exists in the array, then anEntry is inserted after the last one.
sl@0	5747
sl@0	5748	The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object
sl@0	5749	order.
sl@0	5750
sl@0	5751	@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
sl@0	5752	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	5753	of two class T objects.
sl@0	5754
sl@0	5755	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	5756	wide error codes.
sl@0	5757	*/
sl@0	5758	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsq(&anEntry,anOrder,ETrue);}
sl@0	5759
sl@0	5760
sl@0	5761
sl@0	5762	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	5763
sl@0	5764	template <class T>
sl@0	5765	inline void RArray<T>::GranularCompress()
sl@0	5766	/**
sl@0	5767	Compresses the array down to a granular boundary.
sl@0	5768
sl@0	5769	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient
sl@0	5770	for its contained objects. Adding new objects to the array does not result
sl@0	5771	in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of objects reaches
sl@0	5772	a multiple of the granularity.
sl@0	5773	*/
sl@0	5774	{RArrayBase::GranularCompress();}
sl@0	5775
sl@0	5776
sl@0	5777
sl@0	5778
sl@0	5779	template <class T>
sl@0	5780	inline TInt RArray<T>::Reserve(TInt aCount)
sl@0	5781	/**
sl@0	5782	Reserves space for the specified number of elements.
sl@0	5783
sl@0	5784	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient
sl@0	5785	to hold the number of objects specified. Adding new objects to the array
sl@0	5786	does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of
sl@0	5787	objects exceeds the specified count.
sl@0	5788
sl@0	5789	@param aCount The number of objects for which space should be reserved
sl@0	5790	@return KErrNone If the operation completed successfully
sl@0	5791	@return KErrNoMemory If the requested amount of memory could not be allocated
sl@0	5792	*/
sl@0	5793	{ return RArrayBase::DoReserve(aCount); }
sl@0	5794
sl@0	5795
sl@0	5796
sl@0	5797
sl@0	5798	template <class T>
sl@0	5799	inline void RArray<T>::SortSigned()
sl@0	5800	/**
sl@0	5801	Sorts the objects within the array; the sort order is assumed to be in signed
sl@0	5802	integer order.
sl@0	5803	*/
sl@0	5804	{HeapSortSigned();}
sl@0	5805
sl@0	5806
sl@0	5807
sl@0	5808
sl@0	5809	template <class T>
sl@0	5810	inline void RArray<T>::SortUnsigned()
sl@0	5811	/**
sl@0	5812	Sorts the objects within the array; the sort order is assumed to be in unsigned
sl@0	5813	integer order.
sl@0	5814	*/
sl@0	5815	{HeapSortUnsigned();}
sl@0	5816
sl@0	5817
sl@0	5818
sl@0	5819
sl@0	5820	template <class T>
sl@0	5821	inline void RArray<T>::Sort(TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
sl@0	5822	/**
sl@0	5823	Sorts the objects within the array using the specified TLinearOrder.
sl@0	5824
sl@0	5825	The sort order is determined by an algorithm supplied by the caller and
sl@0	5826	packaged as a TLinerOrder<T>.
sl@0	5827
sl@0	5828	@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order
sl@0	5829	of two class T type objects.
sl@0	5830	*/
sl@0	5831	{HeapSort(anOrder);}
sl@0	5832
sl@0	5833
sl@0	5834
sl@0	5835
sl@0	5836	template <class T>
sl@0	5837	inline TArray<T> RArray<T>::Array() const
sl@0	5838	/**
sl@0	5839	Constructs and returns a generic array.
sl@0	5840
sl@0	5841	@return A generic array representing this array.
sl@0	5842	*/
sl@0	5843	{ return TArray<T>(GetCount,GetElementPtr,(const CBase*)this); }
sl@0	5844	#endif
sl@0	5845
sl@0	5846
sl@0	5847
sl@0	5848
sl@0	5849	inline RArray<TInt>::RArray()
sl@0	5850	: RPointerArrayBase()
sl@0	5851	/**
sl@0	5852	Constructs an array object for an array of signed integers with
sl@0	5853	default granularity.
sl@0	5854
sl@0	5855	The default granularity is 8.
sl@0	5856	*/
sl@0	5857	{}
sl@0	5858
sl@0	5859
sl@0	5860
sl@0	5861
sl@0	5862	inline RArray<TInt>::RArray(TInt aGranularity)
sl@0	5863	: RPointerArrayBase(aGranularity)
sl@0	5864	/**
sl@0	5865	Constructs an array object for an array of signed integers with the specified
sl@0	5866	granularity.
sl@0	5867
sl@0	5868	@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
sl@0	5869
sl@0	5870	@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive or is greater than or
sl@0	5871	equal to 0x10000000.
sl@0	5872	*/
sl@0	5873	{}
sl@0	5874
sl@0	5875
sl@0	5876
sl@0	5877
sl@0	5878	/**
sl@0	5879	C++ constructor with minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
sl@0	5880
sl@0	5881	This constructs an array object for an array of signed integers with the
sl@0	5882	specified minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
sl@0	5883
sl@0	5884	@param aMinGrowBy The minimum growth step of the array. Must be between 1 and
sl@0	5885	65535 inclusive.
sl@0	5886	@param aFactor The factor by which the array grows, multiplied by 256.
sl@0	5887	For example 512 specifies a factor of 2. Must be between 257
sl@0	5888	and 32767 inclusive.
sl@0	5889
sl@0	5890	@panic USER 192, if aMinGrowBy<=0 or aMinGrowBy>65535.
sl@0	5891	@panic USER 193, if aFactor<=257 or aFactor>32767.
sl@0	5892	*/
sl@0	5893	inline RArray<TInt>::RArray(TInt aMinGrowBy, TInt aFactor)
sl@0	5894	: RPointerArrayBase(aMinGrowBy, aFactor)
sl@0	5895	{}
sl@0	5896
sl@0	5897
sl@0	5898
sl@0	5899
sl@0	5900	inline void RArray<TInt>::Close()
sl@0	5901	/**
sl@0	5902	Closes the array and frees all memory allocated to the array.
sl@0	5903
sl@0	5904	The function must be called before this array object goes out of scope.
sl@0	5905	*/
sl@0	5906	{RPointerArrayBase::Close();}
sl@0	5907
sl@0	5908
sl@0	5909
sl@0	5910
sl@0	5911	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::Count() const
sl@0	5912	/**
sl@0	5913	Gets the number of signed integers in the array.
sl@0	5914
sl@0	5915	@return The number of signed integers in the array.
sl@0	5916	*/
sl@0	5917	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Count(); }
sl@0	5918
sl@0	5919
sl@0	5920
sl@0	5921
sl@0	5922	inline const TInt& RArray<TInt>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
sl@0	5923	/**
sl@0	5924	Gets a reference to the signed integer located at a specified position within
sl@0	5925	the array.
sl@0	5926
sl@0	5927	The compiler chooses this function if the returned reference is used in an
sl@0	5928	expression where the reference cannot be modified.
sl@0	5929
sl@0	5930	@param anIndex The position of the signed integer within the array. The
sl@0	5931	position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the entry
sl@0	5932	at the beginning of the array.
sl@0	5933
sl@0	5934	@return A const reference to the signed integer at position anIndex within
sl@0	5935	the array.
sl@0	5936
sl@0	5937	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	5938	entries currently in the array.
sl@0	5939	*/
sl@0	5940	{return (const TInt&)At(anIndex);}
sl@0	5941
sl@0	5942
sl@0	5943
sl@0	5944
sl@0	5945	inline TInt& RArray<TInt>::operator[](TInt anIndex)
sl@0	5946	/**
sl@0	5947	Gets a reference to the signed integer located at a specified position within
sl@0	5948	the array.
sl@0	5949
sl@0	5950	The compiler chooses this function if the returned reference is used in an
sl@0	5951	expression where the reference can be modified.
sl@0	5952
sl@0	5953	@param anIndex The position of the signed integer within the array. The
sl@0	5954	position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the entry
sl@0	5955	at the beginning of the array.
sl@0	5956
sl@0	5957	@return A non-const reference to the signed integer at position anIndex within
sl@0	5958	the array.
sl@0	5959
sl@0	5960	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	5961	entries currently in the array.
sl@0	5962	*/
sl@0	5963	{return (TInt&)At(anIndex);}
sl@0	5964
sl@0	5965
sl@0	5966
sl@0	5967
sl@0	5968	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::Append(TInt anEntry)
sl@0	5969	/**
sl@0	5970	Appends a signed integer onto the array.
sl@0	5971
sl@0	5972	@param anEntry The signed integer to be appended.
sl@0	5973
sl@0	5974	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	5975	wide error codes.
sl@0	5976	*/
sl@0	5977	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Append((const TAny*)anEntry); }
sl@0	5978
sl@0	5979
sl@0	5980
sl@0	5981
sl@0	5982	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::Insert(TInt anEntry, TInt aPos)
sl@0	5983	/**
sl@0	5984	Inserts a signed integer into the array at the specified position.
sl@0	5985
sl@0	5986	@param anEntry The signed integer to be inserted.
sl@0	5987	@param aPos The position within the array where the signed integer is to be
sl@0	5988	inserted. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies
sl@0	5989	that an entry is inserted at the beginning of the array.
sl@0	5990
sl@0	5991	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	5992	wide error codes.
sl@0	5993
sl@0	5994	@panic USER 131, if aPos is negative, or is greater than the number of entries
sl@0	5995	currently in the array.
sl@0	5996	*/
sl@0	5997	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Insert((const TAny*)anEntry,aPos); }
sl@0	5998
sl@0	5999
sl@0	6000
sl@0	6001
sl@0	6002	inline void RArray<TInt>::Remove(TInt anIndex)
sl@0	6003	/**
sl@0	6004	Removes the signed integer at the specified position from the array.
sl@0	6005
sl@0	6006	@param anIndex The position within the array from where the signed integer
sl@0	6007	is to be removed. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
sl@0	6008	implies that an entry at the beginning of the array is to be
sl@0	6009	removed.
sl@0	6010
sl@0	6011	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative or is greater than the number of
sl@0	6012	entries currently in the array.
sl@0	6013	*/
sl@0	6014	{RPointerArrayBase::Remove(anIndex);}
sl@0	6015
sl@0	6016
sl@0	6017
sl@0	6018
sl@0	6019	inline void RArray<TInt>::Compress()
sl@0	6020	/**
sl@0	6021	Compresses the array down to a minimum.
sl@0	6022
sl@0	6023	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is just
sl@0	6024	sufficient for its entries. Subsequently adding a new signed integer to the
sl@0	6025	array always results in a re-allocation of memory.
sl@0	6026	*/
sl@0	6027	{RPointerArrayBase::Compress();}
sl@0	6028
sl@0	6029
sl@0	6030
sl@0	6031
sl@0	6032	inline void RArray<TInt>::Reset()
sl@0	6033	/**
sl@0	6034	Empties the array.
sl@0	6035
sl@0	6036	The function frees all memory allocated to the array and
sl@0	6037	resets the internal state so that it is ready to be reused.
sl@0	6038
sl@0	6039	This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to this
sl@0	6040	function.
sl@0	6041	*/
sl@0	6042	{RPointerArrayBase::Reset();}
sl@0	6043
sl@0	6044
sl@0	6045
sl@0	6046
sl@0	6047	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::Find(TInt anEntry) const
sl@0	6048	/**
sl@0	6049	Finds the first signed integer in the array which matches the specified signed
sl@0	6050	integer using a sequential search.
sl@0	6051
sl@0	6052	The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There
sl@0	6053	is no assumption about the order of entries in the array.
sl@0	6054
sl@0	6055	@param anEntry The signed integer to be found.
sl@0	6056
sl@0	6057	@return The index of the first matching signed integer within the array.
sl@0	6058	KErrNotFound, if no matching entry can be found.
sl@0	6059	*/
sl@0	6060	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Find((const TAny*)anEntry); }
sl@0	6061
sl@0	6062
sl@0	6063
sl@0	6064
sl@0	6065	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::FindReverse(TInt anEntry) const
sl@0	6066	/**
sl@0	6067	Finds the last signed integer in the array which matches the specified signed
sl@0	6068	integer using a sequential search.
sl@0	6069
sl@0	6070	The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There
sl@0	6071	is no assumption about the order of entries in the array.
sl@0	6072
sl@0	6073	@param anEntry The signed integer to be found.
sl@0	6074
sl@0	6075	@return The index of the last matching signed integer within the array.
sl@0	6076	KErrNotFound, if no matching entry can be found.
sl@0	6077	*/
sl@0	6078	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindReverse((const TAny*)anEntry); }
sl@0	6079
sl@0	6080
sl@0	6081
sl@0	6082
sl@0	6083	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::FindInOrder(TInt anEntry) const
sl@0	6084	/**
sl@0	6085	Finds the signed integer in the array that matches the specified signed integer
sl@0	6086	using a binary search technique.
sl@0	6087
sl@0	6088	The function assumes that the array is in signed integer order.
sl@0	6089
sl@0	6090	@param anEntry The signed integer to find.
sl@0	6091
sl@0	6092	@return The index of the matching signed integer within the array or KErrNotFound,
sl@0	6093	if no match can be found.
sl@0	6094	*/
sl@0	6095	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqSigned(anEntry); }
sl@0	6096
sl@0	6097
sl@0	6098
sl@0	6099
sl@0	6100	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::FindInOrder(TInt anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
sl@0	6101	/**
sl@0	6102	Finds the signed integer in the array that matches the specified signed integer
sl@0	6103	using a binary search technique.
sl@0	6104
sl@0	6105	The function assumes that the array is in signed integer order.
sl@0	6106
sl@0	6107	@param anEntry The signed integer to find.
sl@0	6108	@param anIndex A TInt suplied by the caller. On return contains an index value.
sl@0	6109	If the function returns KErrNone, this is the index of the
sl@0	6110	matching signed integer within the array.
sl@0	6111	If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
sl@0	6112	first signed integer within the array that is bigger than the
sl@0	6113	signed integer being searched for - if no signed integers within
sl@0	6114	the array are bigger, then the index value is the same as the
sl@0	6115	total number of signed integers within the array.
sl@0	6116
sl@0	6117	@return KErrNone if a matching signed integer is found.
sl@0	6118	KErrNotFound if no match can be found.
sl@0	6119	*/
sl@0	6120	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchSigned(anEntry,anIndex); }
sl@0	6121
sl@0	6122
sl@0	6123
sl@0	6124
sl@0	6125	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::SpecificFindInOrder(TInt anEntry, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	6126	/**
sl@0	6127	Finds the signed integer in the array that matches the specified signed integer
sl@0	6128	using a binary search technique.
sl@0	6129
sl@0	6130	Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, last or any
sl@0	6131	matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	6132
sl@0	6133	The function assumes that the array is in signed integer order.
sl@0	6134
sl@0	6135	@param anEntry The signed integer to be found.
sl@0	6136	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any
sl@0	6137	match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	6138
sl@0	6139	@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
sl@0	6140	index of a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the
sl@0	6141	value of aMode:
sl@0	6142	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	6143	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	6144	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	6145	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element
sl@0	6146	of the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in
sl@0	6147	the array.
sl@0	6148
sl@0	6149	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	6150	*/
sl@0	6151	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqSigned(anEntry,aMode); }
sl@0	6152
sl@0	6153
sl@0	6154
sl@0	6155
sl@0	6156	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::SpecificFindInOrder(TInt anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	6157	/**
sl@0	6158	Finds the signed integer in the array that matches the specified signed integer
sl@0	6159	using a binary search technique.
sl@0	6160
sl@0	6161	Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, last or any
sl@0	6162	matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	6163
sl@0	6164	The function assumes that the array is in signed integer order.
sl@0	6165
sl@0	6166	@param anEntry The signed integer to be found.
sl@0	6167	@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an index
sl@0	6168	value depending on whether a match is found and on the value of aMode.
sl@0	6169	If there is no matching element in the array, then this is the index of
sl@0	6170	the first element in the array that is bigger than the element being
sl@0	6171	searched for - if no elements in the array are bigger, then the index
sl@0	6172	value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	6173	If there is a matching element, then what the index refers to depends
sl@0	6174	on the value of aMode:
sl@0	6175	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	6176	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	6177	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	6178	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element
sl@0	6179	of the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	6180
sl@0	6181	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match,
sl@0	6182	as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	6183
sl@0	6184	@return KErrNone, if a matching element is found;
sl@0	6185	KErrNotFound, if no suitable element can be found.
sl@0	6186
sl@0	6187	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	6188	*/
sl@0	6189	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchSigned(anEntry,anIndex,aMode); }
sl@0	6190
sl@0	6191
sl@0	6192
sl@0	6193
sl@0	6194	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::InsertInOrder(TInt anEntry)
sl@0	6195	/**
sl@0	6196	Inserts a signed integer into the array in signed integer order.
sl@0	6197
sl@0	6198	No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
sl@0	6199	an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
sl@0	6200
sl@0	6201	The function assumes that existing entries within the array are in signed
sl@0	6202	integer order.
sl@0	6203
sl@0	6204	@param anEntry The signed integer to be inserted
sl@0	6205
sl@0	6206	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
sl@0	6207	KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
sl@0	6208	to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
sl@0	6209	error codes.
sl@0	6210	*/
sl@0	6211	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqSigned(anEntry,EFalse); }
sl@0	6212
sl@0	6213
sl@0	6214
sl@0	6215
sl@0	6216	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::InsertInOrderAllowRepeats(TInt anEntry)
sl@0	6217	/**
sl@0	6218	Inserts a signed integer into the array in signed integer order,
sl@0	6219	allowing duplicates.
sl@0	6220
sl@0	6221	If anEntry is a duplicate of an existing entry in the array, then the new
sl@0	6222	signed integer is inserted after the existing one. If more than one duplicate
sl@0	6223	entry already exists in the array, then any new duplicate signed integer is
sl@0	6224	inserted after the last one.
sl@0	6225
sl@0	6226	The function assumes that existing entries within the array are in signed
sl@0	6227	integer order.
sl@0	6228
sl@0	6229	@param anEntry The signed integer to be inserted.
sl@0	6230
sl@0	6231	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	6232	wide error codes.
sl@0	6233	*/
sl@0	6234	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqSigned(anEntry,ETrue); }
sl@0	6235
sl@0	6236
sl@0	6237
sl@0	6238
sl@0	6239	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	6240	inline RArray<TInt>::RArray(TInt* aEntries, TInt aCount)
sl@0	6241	: RPointerArrayBase((TAny**)aEntries, aCount)
sl@0	6242	/**
sl@0	6243	C++ constructor with a pointer to the first array entry in a
sl@0	6244	pre-existing array, and the number of entries in that array.
sl@0	6245
sl@0	6246	This constructor takes a pointer to a pre-existing set of entries of type
sl@0	6247	TInt objects. Ownership of the set of entries does not transfer to
sl@0	6248	this RArray object.
sl@0	6249
sl@0	6250	The purpose of constructing an array in this way is to allow sorting and
sl@0	6251	finding operations to be done without further allocation of memory.
sl@0	6252
sl@0	6253	@param aEntries A pointer to the first entry of type class TInt in the set of
sl@0	6254	entries belonging to the existing array.
sl@0	6255	@param aCount The number of entries in the existing array.
sl@0	6256	*/
sl@0	6257	{}
sl@0	6258
sl@0	6259	inline void RArray<TInt>::GranularCompress()
sl@0	6260	/**
sl@0	6261	Compresses the array down to a granular boundary.
sl@0	6262
sl@0	6263	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient
sl@0	6264	for its contained entries. Adding new signed integers to the array does not
sl@0	6265	result in a re-allocation of memory until the total number of entries reaches
sl@0	6266	a multiple of the granularity.
sl@0	6267	*/
sl@0	6268	{RPointerArrayBase::GranularCompress();}
sl@0	6269
sl@0	6270
sl@0	6271
sl@0	6272
sl@0	6273	inline TInt RArray<TInt>::Reserve(TInt aCount)
sl@0	6274	/**
sl@0	6275	Reserves space for the specified number of elements.
sl@0	6276
sl@0	6277	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient
sl@0	6278	to hold the number of integers specified. Adding new integers to the array
sl@0	6279	does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of
sl@0	6280	integers exceeds the specified count.
sl@0	6281
sl@0	6282	@param aCount The number of integers for which space should be reserved
sl@0	6283	@return KErrNone If the operation completed successfully
sl@0	6284	@return KErrNoMemory If the requested amount of memory could not be allocated
sl@0	6285	*/
sl@0	6286	{ return RPointerArrayBase::DoReserve(aCount); }
sl@0	6287
sl@0	6288
sl@0	6289
sl@0	6290
sl@0	6291	inline void RArray<TInt>::Sort()
sl@0	6292	/**
sl@0	6293	Sorts the array entries into signed integer order.
sl@0	6294	*/
sl@0	6295	{ HeapSortSigned(); }
sl@0	6296
sl@0	6297
sl@0	6298
sl@0	6299
sl@0	6300	inline TArray<TInt> RArray<TInt>::Array() const
sl@0	6301	/**
sl@0	6302	Constructs and returns a generic array.
sl@0	6303
sl@0	6304	@return A generic array representing this array.
sl@0	6305
sl@0	6306	@see TArray
sl@0	6307	*/
sl@0	6308	{ return TArray<TInt>(GetCount,GetElementPtr,(const CBase*)this); }
sl@0	6309	#endif
sl@0	6310
sl@0	6311
sl@0	6312
sl@0	6313	inline RArray<TUint>::RArray()
sl@0	6314	: RPointerArrayBase()
sl@0	6315	/**
sl@0	6316	Default C++ constructor.
sl@0	6317
sl@0	6318	This constructs an array object for an array of unsigned
sl@0	6319	integers with default granularity.
sl@0	6320
sl@0	6321	The default granularity of the array is 8.
sl@0	6322	*/
sl@0	6323	{}
sl@0	6324
sl@0	6325
sl@0	6326
sl@0	6327
sl@0	6328	inline RArray<TUint>::RArray(TInt aGranularity)
sl@0	6329	: RPointerArrayBase(aGranularity)
sl@0	6330	/**
sl@0	6331	Constructs an array object for an array of unsigned integers with the specified
sl@0	6332	granularity.
sl@0	6333
sl@0	6334	@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
sl@0	6335
sl@0	6336	@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive or is greater than or
sl@0	6337	equal to 0x10000000.
sl@0	6338	*/
sl@0	6339	{}
sl@0	6340
sl@0	6341
sl@0	6342
sl@0	6343
sl@0	6344	/**
sl@0	6345	C++ constructor with minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
sl@0	6346
sl@0	6347	This constructs an array object for an array of unsigned integers with the
sl@0	6348	specified minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
sl@0	6349
sl@0	6350	@param aMinGrowBy The minimum growth step of the array. Must be between 1 and
sl@0	6351	65535 inclusive.
sl@0	6352	@param aFactor The factor by which the array grows, multiplied by 256.
sl@0	6353	For example 512 specifies a factor of 2. Must be between 257
sl@0	6354	and 32767 inclusive.
sl@0	6355
sl@0	6356	@panic USER 192, if aMinGrowBy<=0 or aMinGrowBy>65535.
sl@0	6357	@panic USER 193, if aFactor<=257 or aFactor>32767.
sl@0	6358	*/
sl@0	6359	inline RArray<TUint>::RArray(TInt aMinGrowBy, TInt aFactor)
sl@0	6360	: RPointerArrayBase(aMinGrowBy, aFactor)
sl@0	6361	{}
sl@0	6362
sl@0	6363
sl@0	6364
sl@0	6365
sl@0	6366	inline void RArray<TUint>::Close()
sl@0	6367	/**
sl@0	6368	Closes the array and frees all memory allocated to the array.
sl@0	6369
sl@0	6370	The function must be called before this array object goes out of scope.
sl@0	6371	*/
sl@0	6372	{RPointerArrayBase::Close();}
sl@0	6373
sl@0	6374
sl@0	6375
sl@0	6376
sl@0	6377	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::Count() const
sl@0	6378	/**
sl@0	6379	Gets the number of unsigned integers in the array.
sl@0	6380
sl@0	6381	@return The number of unsigned integers in the array.
sl@0	6382	*/
sl@0	6383	{return RPointerArrayBase::Count(); }
sl@0	6384
sl@0	6385
sl@0	6386
sl@0	6387
sl@0	6388	inline const TUint& RArray<TUint>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
sl@0	6389	/**
sl@0	6390	Gets a reference to the unsigned integer located at the specified position
sl@0	6391	within the array.
sl@0	6392
sl@0	6393	The compiler uses this variant if the returned reference is used in an
sl@0	6394	expression where the reference cannot be modified.
sl@0	6395
sl@0	6396	@param anIndex The position of the unsigned integer within the array, relative
sl@0	6397	to zero, i.e. zero implies the entry at the beginning of
sl@0	6398	the array.
sl@0	6399
sl@0	6400	@return A reference to the const unsigned integer at position anIndex within
sl@0	6401	the array.
sl@0	6402
sl@0	6403	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	6404	entries currently in the array.
sl@0	6405	*/
sl@0	6406	{return (const TUint&)At(anIndex);}
sl@0	6407
sl@0	6408
sl@0	6409
sl@0	6410
sl@0	6411	inline TUint& RArray<TUint>::operator[](TInt anIndex)
sl@0	6412	/**
sl@0	6413	Gets a reference to the unsigned integer located at the specified position
sl@0	6414	within the array.
sl@0	6415
sl@0	6416	The compiler uses this variant if the returned reference is used in an
sl@0	6417	expression where the reference can be modified.
sl@0	6418
sl@0	6419	@param anIndex The position of the unsigned integer within the array, relative
sl@0	6420	to zero, i.e. zero implies the entry at the beginning of
sl@0	6421	the array.
sl@0	6422
sl@0	6423	@return A reference to the non-const unsigned integer at position anIndex
sl@0	6424	within the array.
sl@0	6425
sl@0	6426	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	6427	entries currently in the array.
sl@0	6428	*/
sl@0	6429	{return (TUint&)At(anIndex);}
sl@0	6430
sl@0	6431
sl@0	6432
sl@0	6433
sl@0	6434	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::Append(TUint anEntry)
sl@0	6435	/**
sl@0	6436	Appends an unsigned integer onto the array.
sl@0	6437
sl@0	6438	@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be appended.
sl@0	6439	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	6440	wide error codes.
sl@0	6441	*/
sl@0	6442	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Append((const TAny*)anEntry); }
sl@0	6443
sl@0	6444
sl@0	6445
sl@0	6446
sl@0	6447	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::Insert(TUint anEntry, TInt aPos)
sl@0	6448	/**
sl@0	6449	Inserts an unsigned integer into the array at the specified position.
sl@0	6450
sl@0	6451	@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be inserted.
sl@0	6452	@param aPos The position within the array where the unsigned integer is to
sl@0	6453	be inserted. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
sl@0	6454	implies that an entry is inserted at the beginning of
sl@0	6455	the array.
sl@0	6456
sl@0	6457	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	6458	wide error codes.
sl@0	6459
sl@0	6460	@panic USER 131, if aPos is negative, or is greater than the number of entries
sl@0	6461	currently in the array.
sl@0	6462	*/
sl@0	6463	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Insert((const TAny*)anEntry,aPos); }
sl@0	6464
sl@0	6465
sl@0	6466
sl@0	6467
sl@0	6468	inline void RArray<TUint>::Remove(TInt anIndex)
sl@0	6469	/**
sl@0	6470	Removes the unsigned integer at the specified position from the array.
sl@0	6471
sl@0	6472	@param anIndex The position within the array from where the unsigned integer
sl@0	6473	is to be removed. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
sl@0	6474	implies that an entry at the beginning of the array is to be
sl@0	6475	removed.
sl@0	6476
sl@0	6477
sl@0	6478	@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
sl@0	6479	entries currently in the array.
sl@0	6480	*/
sl@0	6481	{RPointerArrayBase::Remove(anIndex);}
sl@0	6482
sl@0	6483
sl@0	6484
sl@0	6485
sl@0	6486	inline void RArray<TUint>::Compress()
sl@0	6487	/**
sl@0	6488	Compresses the array down to a minimum.
sl@0	6489
sl@0	6490	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is just
sl@0	6491	sufficient for its entries. Subsequently adding a new unsigned integer to the
sl@0	6492	array always results in a re-allocation of memory.
sl@0	6493	*/
sl@0	6494	{RPointerArrayBase::Compress();}
sl@0	6495
sl@0	6496
sl@0	6497
sl@0	6498
sl@0	6499	inline void RArray<TUint>::Reset()
sl@0	6500	/**
sl@0	6501	Empties the array.
sl@0	6502
sl@0	6503	It frees all memory allocated to the array and resets the
sl@0	6504	internal state so that it is ready to be reused.
sl@0	6505
sl@0	6506	This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to
sl@0	6507	this function.
sl@0	6508	*/
sl@0	6509	{RPointerArrayBase::Reset();}
sl@0	6510
sl@0	6511
sl@0	6512
sl@0	6513
sl@0	6514	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::Find(TUint anEntry) const
sl@0	6515	/**
sl@0	6516	Finds the first unsigned integer in the array which matches the specified
sl@0	6517	value, using a sequential search.
sl@0	6518
sl@0	6519	The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There
sl@0	6520	is no assumption about the order of entries in the array.
sl@0	6521
sl@0	6522	@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found.
sl@0	6523
sl@0	6524	@return The index of the first matching unsigned integer within the array.
sl@0	6525	KErrNotFound, if no matching entry can be found.
sl@0	6526	*/
sl@0	6527	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Find((const TAny*)anEntry); }
sl@0	6528
sl@0	6529
sl@0	6530
sl@0	6531
sl@0	6532	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::FindReverse(TUint anEntry) const
sl@0	6533	/**
sl@0	6534	Finds the last unsigned integer in the array which matches the specified
sl@0	6535	value, using a sequential search.
sl@0	6536
sl@0	6537	The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There
sl@0	6538	is no assumption about the order of entries in the array.
sl@0	6539
sl@0	6540	@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found.
sl@0	6541
sl@0	6542	@return The index of the last matching unsigned integer within the array.
sl@0	6543	KErrNotFound, if no matching entry can be found.
sl@0	6544	*/
sl@0	6545	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindReverse((const TAny*)anEntry); }
sl@0	6546
sl@0	6547
sl@0	6548
sl@0	6549
sl@0	6550	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::FindInOrder(TUint anEntry) const
sl@0	6551	/**
sl@0	6552	Finds the unsigned integer in the array which matches the specified value,
sl@0	6553	using a binary search technique.
sl@0	6554
sl@0	6555	The functions assume that existing entries within the array are in unsigned
sl@0	6556	integer order.
sl@0	6557
sl@0	6558	@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found.
sl@0	6559
sl@0	6560	@return This is either: the index of the matching unsigned integer within the
sl@0	6561	array;
sl@0	6562	KErrNotFound, if no suitable entry can be found.
sl@0	6563	*/
sl@0	6564	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned(anEntry); }
sl@0	6565
sl@0	6566
sl@0	6567
sl@0	6568
sl@0	6569	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::FindInOrder(TUint anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
sl@0	6570	/**
sl@0	6571	Finds the unsigned integer in the array which matches the specified value,
sl@0	6572	using a binary search technique.
sl@0	6573
sl@0	6574	If the index cannot be found, the function returns the index of the last
sl@0	6575	unsigned integer within the array which logically precedes anEntry.
sl@0	6576
sl@0	6577	The functions assume that existing entries within the array are in unsigned
sl@0	6578	integer order.
sl@0	6579
sl@0	6580	@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found.
sl@0	6581	@param anIndex A TInt supplied by the caller. On return, contains an index
sl@0	6582	value.
sl@0	6583	If the function returns KErrNone, this is the index of the
sl@0	6584	matching unsigned integer within the array.
sl@0	6585	If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
sl@0	6586	first unsigned integer within the array that is bigger than the
sl@0	6587	unsigned integer being searched for - if no unsigned integers within
sl@0	6588	the array are bigger, then the index value is the same as the
sl@0	6589	total number of unsigned integers within the array.
sl@0	6590	@return KErrNone, if a matching unsigned integer is found.
sl@0	6591	KErrNotFound, if no suitable entry can be found.
sl@0	6592	*/
sl@0	6593	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned(anEntry,anIndex); }
sl@0	6594
sl@0	6595
sl@0	6596
sl@0	6597
sl@0	6598	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::SpecificFindInOrder(TUint anEntry, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	6599	/**
sl@0	6600	Finds the unsigned integer in the array that matches the specified unsigned integer
sl@0	6601	using a binary search technique.
sl@0	6602
sl@0	6603	In the case that there is more than one matching element, finds the first, last
sl@0	6604	or any match as specified by the value of aMode.
sl@0	6605
sl@0	6606	The function assumes that the array is in unsigned integer order.
sl@0	6607
sl@0	6608	@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found..
sl@0	6609	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match,
sl@0	6610	as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	6611
sl@0	6612	@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array index of
sl@0	6613	a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the value of
sl@0	6614	aMode:
sl@0	6615	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	6616	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	6617	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	6618	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
sl@0	6619	the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	6620
sl@0	6621	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	6622	*/
sl@0	6623	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned(anEntry,aMode); }
sl@0	6624
sl@0	6625
sl@0	6626
sl@0	6627
sl@0	6628	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::SpecificFindInOrder(TUint anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
sl@0	6629	/**
sl@0	6630	Finds the unsigned integer in the array that matches the specified unsigned integer
sl@0	6631	using a binary search technique.
sl@0	6632
sl@0	6633	In the case that there is more than one matching element, finds the first, last or any match as specified.
sl@0	6634
sl@0	6635	The function assumes that the array is in unsigned integer order.
sl@0	6636
sl@0	6637	@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found.
sl@0	6638	@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an index
sl@0	6639	value depending on whether a match is found and on the value of aMode.
sl@0	6640	If there is no matching element in the array, then this is the index
sl@0	6641	of the first element in the array that is bigger than the element being
sl@0	6642	searched for - if no elements in the array are bigger, then the index
sl@0	6643	value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	6644	If there is a matching element, then what the index refers to depends
sl@0	6645	on the value of aMode:
sl@0	6646	if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
sl@0	6647	if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
sl@0	6648	if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
sl@0	6649	the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
sl@0	6650	then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
sl@0	6651	@param aMode Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match, as defined by one
sl@0	6652	of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
sl@0	6653
sl@0	6654	@return KErrNone, if a matching entry is found; KErrNotFound, if no matching entry exists.
sl@0	6655
sl@0	6656	@see TArrayFindMode
sl@0	6657	*/
sl@0	6658	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned(anEntry,anIndex,aMode); }
sl@0	6659
sl@0	6660
sl@0	6661
sl@0	6662
sl@0	6663	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::InsertInOrder(TUint anEntry)
sl@0	6664	/**
sl@0	6665	Inserts an unsigned integer into the array in unsigned integer order.
sl@0	6666
sl@0	6667	No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
sl@0	6668	an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
sl@0	6669
sl@0	6670	The function assumes that existing entries within the array are in unsigned
sl@0	6671	integer order.
sl@0	6672
sl@0	6673	@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be inserted.
sl@0	6674
sl@0	6675	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
sl@0	6676	KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
sl@0	6677	to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
sl@0	6678	error codes.
sl@0	6679	*/
sl@0	6680	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned(anEntry,EFalse); }
sl@0	6681
sl@0	6682
sl@0	6683
sl@0	6684
sl@0	6685	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::InsertInOrderAllowRepeats(TUint anEntry)
sl@0	6686	/**
sl@0	6687	Inserts an unsigned integer into the array in unsigned integer order, allowing
sl@0	6688	duplicates.
sl@0	6689
sl@0	6690	If the new integer is a duplicate of an existing entry in the array, then
sl@0	6691	the new unsigned integer is inserted after the existing one. If more than
sl@0	6692	one duplicate entry already exists in the array, then any new duplicate
sl@0	6693	unsigned integer is inserted after the last one.
sl@0	6694
sl@0	6695	The function assumes that existing entries within the array are in unsigned
sl@0	6696	integer order.
sl@0	6697
sl@0	6698	@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be inserted.
sl@0	6699
sl@0	6700	@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system
sl@0	6701	wide error codes.
sl@0	6702	*/
sl@0	6703	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned(anEntry,ETrue); }
sl@0	6704
sl@0	6705
sl@0	6706
sl@0	6707
sl@0	6708	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	6709	inline RArray<TUint>::RArray(TUint* aEntries, TInt aCount)
sl@0	6710	: RPointerArrayBase((TAny**)aEntries, aCount)
sl@0	6711	/**
sl@0	6712	C++ constructor with a pointer to the first array entry in a
sl@0	6713	pre-existing array, and the number of entries in that array.
sl@0	6714
sl@0	6715	This constructor takes a pointer to a pre-existing set of entries of type
sl@0	6716	TUint objects. Ownership of the set of entries does not transfer to
sl@0	6717	this RArray object.
sl@0	6718
sl@0	6719	The purpose of constructing an array in this way is to allow sorting and
sl@0	6720	finding operations to be done without further allocation of memory.
sl@0	6721
sl@0	6722	@param aEntries A pointer to the first entry of type class TUint in the set of
sl@0	6723	entries belonging to the existing array.
sl@0	6724	@param aCount The number of entries in the existing array.
sl@0	6725	*/
sl@0	6726	{}
sl@0	6727
sl@0	6728
sl@0	6729
sl@0	6730	inline void RArray<TUint>::GranularCompress()
sl@0	6731	/**
sl@0	6732	Compresses the array down to a granular boundary.
sl@0	6733
sl@0	6734	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient
sl@0	6735	for its contained entries. Adding new unsigned integers to the array does not
sl@0	6736	result in a re-allocation of memory until the total number of entries reaches
sl@0	6737	a multiple of the granularity.
sl@0	6738	*/
sl@0	6739	{RPointerArrayBase::GranularCompress();}
sl@0	6740
sl@0	6741
sl@0	6742
sl@0	6743
sl@0	6744	inline TInt RArray<TUint>::Reserve(TInt aCount)
sl@0	6745	/**
sl@0	6746	Reserves space for the specified number of elements.
sl@0	6747
sl@0	6748	After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient
sl@0	6749	to hold the number of integers specified. Adding new integers to the array
sl@0	6750	does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of
sl@0	6751	integers exceeds the specified count.
sl@0	6752
sl@0	6753	@param aCount The number of integers for which space should be reserved
sl@0	6754	@return KErrNone If the operation completed successfully
sl@0	6755	@return KErrNoMemory If the requested amount of memory could not be allocated
sl@0	6756	*/
sl@0	6757	{ return RPointerArrayBase::DoReserve(aCount); }
sl@0	6758
sl@0	6759
sl@0	6760
sl@0	6761
sl@0	6762	inline void RArray<TUint>::Sort()
sl@0	6763	/**
sl@0	6764	Sorts the array entries into unsigned integer order.
sl@0	6765	*/
sl@0	6766	{ HeapSortUnsigned(); }
sl@0	6767
sl@0	6768
sl@0	6769
sl@0	6770
sl@0	6771	inline TArray<TUint> RArray<TUint>::Array() const
sl@0	6772	/**
sl@0	6773	Constructs and returns a generic array.
sl@0	6774
sl@0	6775	@return A generic array representing this array.
sl@0	6776
sl@0	6777	@see TArray
sl@0	6778	*/
sl@0	6779	{ return TArray<TUint>(GetCount,GetElementPtr,(const CBase*)this); }
sl@0	6780	#endif
sl@0	6781
sl@0	6782
sl@0	6783
sl@0	6784
sl@0	6785	/**
sl@0	6786	Sets an argument to default value and type.
sl@0	6787	*/
sl@0	6788	inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt,TNothing)
sl@0	6789	{}
sl@0	6790
sl@0	6791
sl@0	6792
sl@0	6793
sl@0	6794	/**
sl@0	6795	Sets an argument value of TInt type.
sl@0	6796
sl@0	6797	@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
sl@0	6798	into which the argument value is to be placed.
sl@0	6799	This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
sl@0	6800	@param aValue The argument value.
sl@0	6801	*/
sl@0	6802	inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,TInt aValue)
sl@0	6803	{
sl@0	6804	iArgs[aIndex] = aValue;
sl@0	6805	iFlags \|= EUnspecified<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
sl@0	6806	}
sl@0	6807
sl@0	6808
sl@0	6809
sl@0	6810
sl@0	6811	/**
sl@0	6812	Sets an argument value of TAny* type.
sl@0	6813
sl@0	6814	@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
sl@0	6815	into which the argument value is to be placed.
sl@0	6816	This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
sl@0	6817	@param aValue The argument value.
sl@0	6818	*/
sl@0	6819	inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,const TAny* aValue)
sl@0	6820	{
sl@0	6821	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue;
sl@0	6822	iFlags \|= EUnspecified<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
sl@0	6823	}
sl@0	6824
sl@0	6825
sl@0	6826
sl@0	6827
sl@0	6828	/**
sl@0	6829	Sets an argument value of RHandleBase type.
sl@0	6830
sl@0	6831	@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
sl@0	6832	into which the argument value is to be placed.
sl@0	6833	This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
sl@0	6834	@param aValue The argument value.
sl@0	6835	*/
sl@0	6836	inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,RHandleBase aValue)
sl@0	6837	{
sl@0	6838	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue.Handle();
sl@0	6839	iFlags \|= EHandle<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
sl@0	6840	}
sl@0	6841
sl@0	6842
sl@0	6843
sl@0	6844
sl@0	6845	/**
sl@0	6846	Sets an argument value TDesC8* type.
sl@0	6847
sl@0	6848	@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
sl@0	6849	into which the argument value is to be placed.
sl@0	6850	This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
sl@0	6851	@param aValue The argument value.
sl@0	6852	*/
sl@0	6853	inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,const TDesC8* aValue)
sl@0	6854	{
sl@0	6855	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue;
sl@0	6856	iFlags \|= EDesC8<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
sl@0	6857	}
sl@0	6858
sl@0	6859
sl@0	6860
sl@0	6861
sl@0	6862	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	6863
sl@0	6864	/**
sl@0	6865	Sets an argument value of TDesC16* type.
sl@0	6866
sl@0	6867	@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
sl@0	6868	into which the argument value is to be placed.
sl@0	6869	This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
sl@0	6870	@param aValue The argument value.
sl@0	6871	*/
sl@0	6872	inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,const TDesC16* aValue)
sl@0	6873	{
sl@0	6874	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue;
sl@0	6875	iFlags \|= EDesC16<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
sl@0	6876	}
sl@0	6877
sl@0	6878	#endif
sl@0	6879
sl@0	6880
sl@0	6881
sl@0	6882
sl@0	6883	/**
sl@0	6884	Sets an argument value of TDes8* type.
sl@0	6885
sl@0	6886	@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
sl@0	6887	into which the argument value is to be placed.
sl@0	6888	This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
sl@0	6889	@param aValue The argument value.
sl@0	6890	*/
sl@0	6891	inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,TDes8* aValue)
sl@0	6892	{
sl@0	6893	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue;
sl@0	6894	iFlags \|= EDes8<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
sl@0	6895	}
sl@0	6896
sl@0	6897
sl@0	6898
sl@0	6899
sl@0	6900	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	6901
sl@0	6902	/**
sl@0	6903	Sets an argument value of TDes16* type.
sl@0	6904
sl@0	6905	@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
sl@0	6906	into which the argument value is to be placed.
sl@0	6907	This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
sl@0	6908	@param aValue The argument value.
sl@0	6909	*/
sl@0	6910	inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,TDes16* aValue)
sl@0	6911	{
sl@0	6912	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue;
sl@0	6913	iFlags \|= EDes16<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
sl@0	6914	}
sl@0	6915
sl@0	6916	#endif
sl@0	6917
sl@0	6918
sl@0	6919	/**
sl@0	6920	Allows the client to specify whether each argument of the TIpcArgs object will
sl@0	6921	be pinned before being sent to the server.
sl@0	6922
sl@0	6923	To pin all the arguments in the TIpcArgs object pass no parameters to this
sl@0	6924	method.
sl@0	6925
sl@0	6926	@return A reference to this TIpcArgs object that can be passed as a parameter to
sl@0	6927	one of the overloads the DSession::Send() and DSession::SendReceive() methods.
sl@0	6928	*/
sl@0	6929	inline TIpcArgs& TIpcArgs::PinArgs(TBool aPinArg0, TBool aPinArg1, TBool aPinArg2, TBool aPinArg3)
sl@0	6930	{
sl@0	6931	__ASSERT_COMPILE(!((1 << ((KBitsPerType*KMaxMessageArguments)-1)) & KPinMask));
sl@0	6932	if (aPinArg0)
sl@0	6933	iFlags \|= KPinArg0;
sl@0	6934	if (aPinArg1)
sl@0	6935	iFlags \|= KPinArg1;
sl@0	6936	if (aPinArg2)
sl@0	6937	iFlags \|= KPinArg2;
sl@0	6938	if (aPinArg3)
sl@0	6939	iFlags \|= KPinArg3;
sl@0	6940	return *this;
sl@0	6941	}
sl@0	6942
sl@0	6943
sl@0	6944	inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(TNothing)
sl@0	6945	{ return EUnspecified; }
sl@0	6946	inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(TInt)
sl@0	6947	{ return EUnspecified; }
sl@0	6948	inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(const TAny*)
sl@0	6949	{ return EUnspecified; }
sl@0	6950	inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(RHandleBase)
sl@0	6951	{ return EHandle; }
sl@0	6952	inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(const TDesC8*)
sl@0	6953	{ return EDesC8; }
sl@0	6954	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	6955	inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(const TDesC16*)
sl@0	6956	{ return EDesC16; }
sl@0	6957	#endif
sl@0	6958	inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(TDes8*)
sl@0	6959	{ return EDes8; }
sl@0	6960	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	6961	inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(TDes16*)
sl@0	6962	{ return EDes16; }
sl@0	6963	#endif
sl@0	6964	inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt&,TIpcArgs::TNothing)
sl@0	6965	{}
sl@0	6966	inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,TInt aValue)
sl@0	6967	{ aArg = aValue; }
sl@0	6968	inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,const TAny* aValue)
sl@0	6969	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue; }
sl@0	6970	inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,RHandleBase aValue)
sl@0	6971	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue.Handle(); }
sl@0	6972	inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,const TDesC8* aValue)
sl@0	6973	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue; }
sl@0	6974	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	6975	inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,const TDesC16* aValue)
sl@0	6976	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue; }
sl@0	6977	#endif
sl@0	6978	inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,TDes8* aValue)
sl@0	6979	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue; }
sl@0	6980	#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	6981	inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,TDes16* aValue)
sl@0	6982	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue; }
sl@0	6983	#endif
sl@0	6984
sl@0	6985
sl@0	6986
sl@0	6987	// Structures for passing 64 bit integers and doubles across GCC/EABI boundaries
sl@0	6988
sl@0	6989	inline SInt64::SInt64()
sl@0	6990	{}
sl@0	6991
sl@0	6992	inline SInt64::SInt64(Int64 a)
sl@0	6993	{
sl@0	6994	iData[0] = (TUint32)((Uint64)a);
sl@0	6995	iData[1] = (TUint32)(((Uint64)a)>>32);
sl@0	6996	}
sl@0	6997
sl@0	6998	inline SInt64& SInt64::operator=(Int64 a)
sl@0	6999	{
sl@0	7000	iData[0] = (TUint32)((Uint64)a);
sl@0	7001	iData[1] = (TUint32)(((Uint64)a)>>32);
sl@0	7002	return *this;
sl@0	7003	}
sl@0	7004
sl@0	7005	inline SInt64::operator Int64() const
sl@0	7006	{
sl@0	7007	Int64 x;
sl@0	7008	TUint32* px = (TUint32*)&x;
sl@0	7009	px[0] = iData[0];
sl@0	7010	px[1] = iData[1];
sl@0	7011	return x;
sl@0	7012	}
sl@0	7013
sl@0	7014	inline SUint64::SUint64()
sl@0	7015	{}
sl@0	7016
sl@0	7017	inline SUint64::SUint64(Uint64 a)
sl@0	7018	{
sl@0	7019	iData[0] = (TUint32)a;
sl@0	7020	iData[1] = (TUint32)(a>>32);
sl@0	7021	}
sl@0	7022
sl@0	7023	inline SUint64& SUint64::operator=(Uint64 a)
sl@0	7024	{
sl@0	7025	iData[0] = (TUint32)a;
sl@0	7026	iData[1] = (TUint32)(a>>32);
sl@0	7027	return *this;
sl@0	7028	}
sl@0	7029
sl@0	7030	inline SUint64::operator Uint64() const
sl@0	7031	{
sl@0	7032	Uint64 x;
sl@0	7033	TUint32* px = (TUint32*)&x;
sl@0	7034	px[0] = iData[0];
sl@0	7035	px[1] = iData[1];
sl@0	7036	return x;
sl@0	7037	}
sl@0	7038
sl@0	7039	inline SDouble::SDouble()
sl@0	7040	{}
sl@0	7041
sl@0	7042	inline SDouble::SDouble(TReal a)
sl@0	7043	{
sl@0	7044	const TUint32* pa = (const TUint32*)&a;
sl@0	7045	#ifdef __DOUBLE_WORDS_SWAPPED__
sl@0	7046	iData[0] = pa[1];
sl@0	7047	iData[1] = pa[0]; // compiler puts MS word of double first
sl@0	7048	#else
sl@0	7049	iData[0] = pa[0];
sl@0	7050	iData[1] = pa[1]; // compiler puts MS word of double second
sl@0	7051	#endif
sl@0	7052	}
sl@0	7053
sl@0	7054	inline SDouble& SDouble::operator=(TReal a)
sl@0	7055	{
sl@0	7056	new (this) SDouble(a);
sl@0	7057	return *this;
sl@0	7058	}
sl@0	7059
sl@0	7060	inline SDouble::operator TReal() const
sl@0	7061	{
sl@0	7062	TReal x;
sl@0	7063	TUint32* px = (TUint32*)&x;
sl@0	7064	#ifdef __DOUBLE_WORDS_SWAPPED__
sl@0	7065	px[1] = iData[0];
sl@0	7066	px[0] = iData[1]; // compiler puts MS word of double first
sl@0	7067	#else
sl@0	7068	px[0] = iData[0];
sl@0	7069	px[1] = iData[1]; // compiler puts MS word of double second
sl@0	7070	#endif
sl@0	7071	return x;
sl@0	7072	}
sl@0	7073
sl@0	7074	//
sl@0	7075	// TSecureId
sl@0	7076	//
sl@0	7077
sl@0	7078	/** Default constructor. This leaves the object in an undefined state */
sl@0	7079	inline TSecureId::TSecureId()
sl@0	7080	{}
sl@0	7081
sl@0	7082	/** Construct 'this' using a TUint32
sl@0	7083	@param aId The value for the ID */
sl@0	7084	inline TSecureId::TSecureId(TUint32 aId)
sl@0	7085	: iId(aId) {}
sl@0	7086
sl@0	7087	/** Convert 'this' into a TUint32
sl@0	7088	*/
sl@0	7089	inline TSecureId::operator TUint32() const
sl@0	7090	{ return iId; }
sl@0	7091
sl@0	7092	/** Construct 'this' using a TUid
sl@0	7093	@param aId The value for the ID */
sl@0	7094	inline TSecureId::TSecureId(TUid aId)
sl@0	7095	: iId(aId.iUid) {}
sl@0	7096
sl@0	7097	/** Convert 'this' into a TUid
sl@0	7098	*/
sl@0	7099	inline TSecureId::operator TUid() const
sl@0	7100	{ return (TUid&)iId; }
sl@0	7101
sl@0	7102	//
sl@0	7103	// SSecureId
sl@0	7104	//
sl@0	7105	inline const TSecureId* SSecureId::operator&() const
sl@0	7106	{ return (const TSecureId*)this; }
sl@0	7107	inline SSecureId::operator const TSecureId&() const
sl@0	7108	{ /* coverity[return_local_addr] */ return (const TSecureId&)iId; }
sl@0	7109	inline SSecureId::operator TUint32() const
sl@0	7110	{ return iId; }
sl@0	7111	inline SSecureId::operator TUid() const
sl@0	7112	{ return (TUid&)iId; }
sl@0	7113
sl@0	7114	//
sl@0	7115	// TVendorId
sl@0	7116	//
sl@0	7117
sl@0	7118	/** Default constructor which leaves the object in an undefined state */
sl@0	7119	inline TVendorId::TVendorId()
sl@0	7120	{}
sl@0	7121
sl@0	7122	/** Construct 'this' using a TUint32
sl@0	7123	@param aId The value for the ID */
sl@0	7124	inline TVendorId::TVendorId(TUint32 aId)
sl@0	7125	: iId(aId) {}
sl@0	7126
sl@0	7127	/** Convert 'this' into a TUint32
sl@0	7128	*/
sl@0	7129	inline TVendorId::operator TUint32() const
sl@0	7130	{ return iId; }
sl@0	7131
sl@0	7132	/** Construct 'this' using a TUid
sl@0	7133	@param aId The value for the ID */
sl@0	7134	inline TVendorId::TVendorId(TUid aId)
sl@0	7135	: iId(aId.iUid) {}
sl@0	7136
sl@0	7137	/** Convert 'this' into a TUid
sl@0	7138	*/
sl@0	7139	inline TVendorId::operator TUid() const
sl@0	7140	{ return (TUid&)iId; }
sl@0	7141
sl@0	7142	//
sl@0	7143	// SSecureId
sl@0	7144	//
sl@0	7145	inline const TVendorId* SVendorId::operator&() const
sl@0	7146	{ return (const TVendorId*)this; }
sl@0	7147	inline SVendorId::operator const TVendorId&() const
sl@0	7148	{ /* coverity[return_local_addr] */ return (const TVendorId&)iId; }
sl@0	7149	inline SVendorId::operator TUint32() const
sl@0	7150	{ return iId; }
sl@0	7151	inline SVendorId::operator TUid() const
sl@0	7152	{ return (TUid&)iId; }
sl@0	7153
sl@0	7154	//
sl@0	7155	// TSharedChunkBufConfigBase
sl@0	7156	//
sl@0	7157	inline TSharedChunkBufConfigBase::TSharedChunkBufConfigBase()
sl@0	7158	{memset(this,0,sizeof(TSharedChunkBufConfigBase));}
sl@0	7159
sl@0	7160	/**
sl@0	7161	Default constructor. This leaves the set in an undefned state.
sl@0	7162	*/
sl@0	7163	inline TCapabilitySet::TCapabilitySet()
sl@0	7164	{}
sl@0	7165
sl@0	7166	/**
sl@0	7167	Construct a set consisting of a single capability.
sl@0	7168	@param aCapability The single capability
sl@0	7169	*/
sl@0	7170	inline TCapabilitySet::TCapabilitySet(TCapability aCapability)
sl@0	7171	{ new (this) TCapabilitySet(aCapability, aCapability); }
sl@0	7172
sl@0	7173	/**
sl@0	7174	Make this set consist of a single capability.
sl@0	7175	@param aCapability The single capability.
sl@0	7176	*/
sl@0	7177	inline void TCapabilitySet::Set(TCapability aCapability)
sl@0	7178	{ new (this) TCapabilitySet(aCapability, aCapability); }
sl@0	7179
sl@0	7180	/**
sl@0	7181	Make this set consist of two capabilities.
sl@0	7182	@param aCapability1 The first capability.
sl@0	7183	@param aCapability2 The second capability.
sl@0	7184	*/
sl@0	7185	inline void TCapabilitySet::Set(TCapability aCapability1, TCapability aCapability2)
sl@0	7186	{ new (this) TCapabilitySet(aCapability1, aCapability2); }
sl@0	7187
sl@0	7188
sl@0	7189	/**
sl@0	7190	Default constructor. This leaves the object in an undefned state.
sl@0	7191	*/
sl@0	7192	inline TSecurityInfo::TSecurityInfo()
sl@0	7193	{}
sl@0	7194
sl@0	7195	/** Constructs a TSecurityPolicy that will always fail, irrespective of the
sl@0	7196	checked object's attributes.
sl@0	7197	*/
sl@0	7198	inline TSecurityPolicy::TSecurityPolicy()
sl@0	7199	{ new (this) TSecurityPolicy(EAlwaysFail); }
sl@0	7200
sl@0	7201	/**
sl@0	7202	'Address of' operator which generates a TSecurityPolicy*
sl@0	7203	@return A pointer of type TSecurityPolicy which refers to this object
sl@0	7204	*/
sl@0	7205	inline const TSecurityPolicy* TStaticSecurityPolicy::operator&() const
sl@0	7206	{ return (const TSecurityPolicy*)this; }
sl@0	7207
sl@0	7208	/**
sl@0	7209	'Reference of' operator which generates a TSecurityPolicy&
sl@0	7210	@return A reference of type TSecurityPolicy which refers to this object
sl@0	7211	*/
sl@0	7212	inline TStaticSecurityPolicy::operator const TSecurityPolicy&() const
sl@0	7213	{ return (const TSecurityPolicy)this; }
sl@0	7214
sl@0	7215	/**
sl@0	7216	A method to explicity generate a TSecurityPolicy reference.
sl@0	7217	@return A reference of type TSecurityPolicy which refers to this object
sl@0	7218	*/
sl@0	7219	inline const TSecurityPolicy& TStaticSecurityPolicy::operator()() const
sl@0	7220	{ return (const TSecurityPolicy)this; }
sl@0	7221
sl@0	7222	#ifdef __KERNEL_MODE__
sl@0	7223	#ifndef __REMOVE_PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRINGS__
sl@0	7224
sl@0	7225	/** Checks this policy against the platform security attributes of aProcess.
sl@0	7226
sl@0	7227	When a check fails the action taken is determined by the system wide Platform Security
sl@0	7228	configuration. If PlatSecDiagnostics is ON, then a diagnostic message is emitted.
sl@0	7229	If PlatSecEnforcement is OFF, then this function will return ETrue even though the
sl@0	7230	check failed.
sl@0	7231
sl@0	7232	@param aProcess The DProcess object to check against this TSecurityPolicy.
sl@0	7233	@param aDiagnostic A string that will be emitted along with any diagnostic message
sl@0	7234	that may be issued if the policy check fails.
sl@0	7235	This string must be enclosed in the __PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRING macro
sl@0	7236	which enables it to be easily removed from the system.
sl@0	7237	@return ETrue if all the requirements of this TSecurityPolicy are met by the
sl@0	7238	platform security attributes of aProcess, EFalse otherwise.
sl@0	7239	@panic KERN-COMMON 190 if 'this' is an invalid SSecurityInfo object
sl@0	7240	*/
sl@0	7241	inline TBool TSecurityPolicy::CheckPolicy(DProcess* aProcess, const char* aDiagnostic) const
sl@0	7242	{
sl@0	7243	return DoCheckPolicy(aProcess, aDiagnostic);
sl@0	7244	}
sl@0	7245
sl@0	7246	/** Checks this policy against the platform security attributes of the process
sl@0	7247	owning aThread.
sl@0	7248
sl@0	7249	When a check fails the action taken is determined by the system wide Platform Security
sl@0	7250	configuration. If PlatSecDiagnostics is ON, then a diagnostic message is emitted.
sl@0	7251	If PlatSecEnforcement is OFF, then this function will return ETrue even though the
sl@0	7252	check failed.
sl@0	7253
sl@0	7254	@param aThread The thread whose owning process' platform security attributes
sl@0	7255	are to be checked against this TSecurityPolicy.
sl@0	7256	@param aDiagnostic A string that will be emitted along with any diagnostic message
sl@0	7257	that may be issued if the policy check fails.
sl@0	7258	This string must be enclosed in the __PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRING macro
sl@0	7259	which enables it to be easily removed from the system.
sl@0	7260	@return ETrue if all the requirements of this TSecurityPolicy are met by the
sl@0	7261	platform security parameters of the owning process of aThread, EFalse otherwise.
sl@0	7262	@panic KERN-COMMON 190 if 'this' is an invalid SSecurityInfo object
sl@0	7263	*/
sl@0	7264	inline TBool TSecurityPolicy::CheckPolicy(DThread* aThread, const char* aDiagnostic) const
sl@0	7265	{
sl@0	7266	return DoCheckPolicy(aThread, aDiagnostic);
sl@0	7267	}
sl@0	7268
sl@0	7269	#else //__REMOVE_PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRINGS__
sl@0	7270
sl@0	7271	/** Checks this policy against the platform security attributes of aProcess.
sl@0	7272
sl@0	7273	When a check fails the action taken is determined by the system wide Platform Security
sl@0	7274	configuration. If PlatSecDiagnostics is ON, then a diagnostic message is emitted.
sl@0	7275	If PlatSecEnforcement is OFF, then this function will return ETrue even though the
sl@0	7276	check failed.
sl@0	7277
sl@0	7278	@param aProcess The DProcess object to check against this TSecurityPolicy.
sl@0	7279	@param aDiagnostic A string that will be emitted along with any diagnostic message
sl@0	7280	that may be issued if the policy check fails.
sl@0	7281	This string must be enclosed in the __PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRING macro
sl@0	7282	which enables it to be easily removed from the system.
sl@0	7283	@return ETrue if all the requirements of this TSecurityPolicy are met by the
sl@0	7284	platform security attributes of aProcess, EFalse otherwise.
sl@0	7285	@panic KERN-COMMON 190 if 'this' is an invalid SSecurityInfo object
sl@0	7286	*/
sl@0	7287	inline TBool TSecurityPolicy::CheckPolicy(DProcess* aProcess, OnlyCreateWithNull /aDiagnostic/) const
sl@0	7288	{
sl@0	7289	return DoCheckPolicy(aProcess);
sl@0	7290	}
sl@0	7291
sl@0	7292	/** Checks this policy against the platform security attributes of the process
sl@0	7293	owning aThread.
sl@0	7294
sl@0	7295	When a check fails the action taken is determined by the system wide Platform Security
sl@0	7296	configuration. If PlatSecDiagnostics is ON, then a diagnostic message is emitted.
sl@0	7297	If PlatSecEnforcement is OFF, then this function will return ETrue even though the
sl@0	7298	check failed.
sl@0	7299
sl@0	7300	@param aThread The thread whose owning process' platform security attributes
sl@0	7301	are to be checked against this TSecurityPolicy.
sl@0	7302	@param aDiagnostic A string that will be emitted along with any diagnostic message
sl@0	7303	that may be issued if the policy check fails.
sl@0	7304	This string must be enclosed in the __PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRING macro
sl@0	7305	which enables it to be easily removed from the system.
sl@0	7306	@return ETrue if all the requirements of this TSecurityPolicy are met by the
sl@0	7307	platform security parameters of the owning process of aThread, EFalse otherwise.
sl@0	7308	@panic KERN-COMMON 190 if 'this' is an invalid SSecurityInfo object
sl@0	7309	*/
sl@0	7310	inline TBool TSecurityPolicy::CheckPolicy(DThread* aThread, OnlyCreateWithNull /aDiagnostic/) const
sl@0	7311	{
sl@0	7312	return DoCheckPolicy(aThread);
sl@0	7313	}
sl@0	7314
sl@0	7315	#endif // !__REMOVE_PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRINGS__
sl@0	7316	#endif // __KERNEL_MODE__

author	sl
	Tue, 10 Jun 2014 14:32:02 +0200 (2014-06-10)
changeset 1	260cb5ec6c19
permissions	-rw-r--r--